Yamaha RX-A810 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-A810

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: El manual del propietario

En 1

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

English for Europe

Be sure to read “Safety Brochure” (supplied booklet) before using this unit.

En 2

CONTENTS

What you can do with this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Connecting video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Connecting audio devices (CD players, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

6 Connecting to the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Connecting an external power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Connecting video/audio recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Connecting a device compatible with SCENE link playback (remote connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . 36

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Selecting the input source and favorite settings at once (SCENE) . . 44

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Registering favorite radio stations (preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Playing back iPod music/videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Playback of iPod contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Connecting a Bluetooth receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Pairing Bluetooth components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Establishing a wireless connection and playing back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

FEATURES

SETUP

PLAYBACK

En 3

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Playing back music stored on PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Preparing for Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Controlling this unit from the web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Configuring settings in accordance with a playback source (Option menu)

. . . 77

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)

. . . 85

Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Viewing information about this unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . 101

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . 103

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Setting the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Setting the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Updating the firmware of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

CONFIGURATIONS APPENDIX

En 4

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

En 5

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with this product.

■ Remote control ■ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x 2)

■ YPAO microphone ■ Power cable

Insert into the remote control in the correct polarity (+/-)

■ AM antenna ■ FM antenna

■ Easy Setup Guide ■ CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)

■ Safety Brochure

*The figure of the supplied power cable

differs depending on regions.

*The figure of the supplied FM antenna

differs depending on regions.

Operating range of the remote control

• Aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of

differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

• This manual mainly explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” means both “iPod” and

“iPhone” unless the explanation describes exceptions.

• “ ” indicates the cautions concerning operations or setup of the unit.

• “ ” indicates the explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within 6 m

En 6

FEATURES

What you can do with this unit

Supports 2 to 7.1 (plus presence) channel

speaker system. Allows you to enjoy favorite

acoustic spaces in various styles.

Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

p.36

Sound field reproductions like actual

movie theaters and concert halls from

stereo or multi-channel audio sources

(CINEMA DSP)

p.46

Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

p.49

Ready for any kind of contents

iPod

p.54

Network

p.64 to p.67

USB

p.61

Bluetooth

p.59

*Requires optional Bluetooth receiver for playback via Bluetooth

Operating external

devices with the supplied

remote control

p.106

Operating the TV, AV

receiver and BD/DVD

player in combination

(HDMI Control)

p.123

Selecting the input source

and favorite settings at

once (SCENE)

p.44

AV receiver (this unit)

Speakers

USB deviceNetwork contents

via Bluetooth

iPod

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

Remote control

of this unit

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Video

En 7

Full of useful functions!

● Connecting various devices (p.26)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on this unit allow you to connect video devices such as

BD/DVD players, audio devices such as CD players,

game consoles and camcorders, and so on.

● Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.21)

When using a TV that supports ARC, you only need a

single HDMI cable to connect the TV and this unit to

output video to the TV, input audio from the TV, and

transmit HDMI Control signals.

● Creating stereoscopic sound fields (p.48)

Connection of presence speakers enables to create a

natural stereoscopic sound field in your room (CINEMA

DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers are

connected, this unit automatically creates Virtual

Presence Speaker (VPS) to produce 3D surround

sound.

● Listening to FM/AM radio (p.50)

This unit is equipped with the built-in FM/AM tuner. You

can register favorite radio stations as presets.

● Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.49)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, this unit plays

back the selected source with the least circuitry. It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

● Easy operation with a TV screen

You can navigate the various contents (iPod, USB,

network, etc.), view the information, or configure the

settings using the on-screen menu.

At time like this

The combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on

this unit does not match an external device...

Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the

combination of video/audio input jacks so that it match the

output jack of your external device (p.28).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.94).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select whether

to output audio signals through this unit and the TV (p.97).

I want to this unit to be turned off automatically when not in

use...

Use “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to set the

amount of time for auto-standby (p.99).

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language

from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish and

Russian (p.101).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update

the firmware of this unit (p.105). If this unit is connected to

the Internet, the corresponding message will be displayed

on the TV when a newer firmware is available (p.110).

There are many other settings to customize this unit.

For details, see the following pages.

●Input settings (p.80)

●Scene settings (p.83)

●Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.86)

●Various function settings (p.89)

●Information view (audio signal, video signal, etc.) (p.102)

●System settings (p.103)

Turntable

BD/DVD

player

Game

console

Camcorder

CD player

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

En 8

Front panel

1 MAIN ZONE

Turns on/off (standby) this unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when this unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

- HDMI Control is enabled (p.123)

- The standby through function is enabled (p.97)

- The network standby function is enabled (p.98)

- The iPod is being charged (p.81)

- An iPod wireless system is connected (p.55)

3 ZONE2

Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.71).

4 ZONE CONTROL

Switches the zones (main or Zone2) to operate with the front

panel controllers (p.71).

5 INFO

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.76).

6 MEMORY

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.50).

Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.73).

7 PRESET

Selects a preset FM/AM radio station (p.51).

Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.73).

8 FM/AM

Switches between FM and AM (p.50).

9 Front display

Displays information (p.9).

0 TUNING

Selects an FM/AM radio frequency (p.50).

A Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

B PURE DIRECT

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.49).

C INPUT

Selects an input source.

D SCENE

Selects the registered input source and sound program, and

HDMI output at once. Additionally, you can turn on this unit

when it is in standby mode (p.44).

E PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

F USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.61) or an iPod via

USB (p.54).

G TONE CONTROL

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of sounds output from speakers and headphones (p.78).

H PROGRAM

Selects a sound program or a surround decoder (p.45).

I STRAIGHT

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.48).

J VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting camcorders, game consoles, etc (p.29).

K YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36).

L VOLUME

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL INFO MEMORY

FM AM

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

BD/DVD TV CD RADIO

SCENE

INPUT

MAIN ZONE

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-A810

PRESET TUNING

HDMI INVIDEO L AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

STRAIGHT

TONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

USB

iPod/iPhone

PROGRAM

BA97 8

C L

E FD G KI JH

Opening the front panel door

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of

the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks

behind the front panel door.

En 9

Front display (indicators)

1 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

OUT1/OUT2

Indicate the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal.

2 CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.46) is working.

CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) is working.

3 ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49) is

working.

4 ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.78) is working.

5 STEREO

Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when this unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

6 PARTY

Lights up when this unit is in the party mode.

7 SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

8 ZONE 2

Lights up when the audio output to Zone2 is enabled.

9 MUTE

Flashes when audio is muted.

0 Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

A Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

B Information display

Displays the current status (input name, sound mode name,

etc). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.76).

C Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

Front speaker (L)

Front speaker (R)

Center speaker

Surround speaker (L)

Surround speaker (R)

Surround back speaker (L)

Surround back speaker (R)

Surround back speaker

Presence speaker (L)

Presence speaker (R)

Subwoofer

STEREO

SLEEP

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

MUTE

ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC

OUT

1 2

ZONE

SBL SB SBR

PARTY

4 6

789 0

A AB C

En 10

Rear panel

1 DOCK jack

For connecting an optional Yamaha products such as iPod

dock (p.55), iPod wireless system (p.55), and Bluetooth

receiver (p.59).

2 PHONO jacks

For connecting a turntable (p.29).

3 NETWORK jack

For connecting to the network (p.31).

4 ANTENNA jacks

For connecting FM and AM antennas (p.30).

5 HDMI OUT 1~2 jacks

For connecting HDMI-compatible TVs to output video/audio

signals (p.21). When using ARC, TV audio signal is input

through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

6 HDMI1~7 jacks

For connecting HDMI-compatible playback devices to input

video/audio signals (p.26).

7 RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.

Consult your dealer for details.

8 SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting speakers (p.17).

9 AV1~6 jacks

For connecting video/audio playback devices to input video/

audio signals (p.26).

0 AV OUT jacks

For outputting video/audio to a recording device (VCR, etc.)

when an analog input (V-AUX, AV3~6 or AUDIO1~2) is

selected (p.32).

A AUDIO1~2 jacks

For connecting audio playback devices to input audio

signals (p.29).

B MONITOR OUT jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO jack:

For connecting a TV compatible with component video to

output video signals (p.25).

VIDEO jack:

For connecting a TV compatible with composite video to

output video signals (p.25).

C REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting a Yamaha product compatible with SCENE

link playback (p.33), or connecting an infrared signal

receiver/emitter to operate devices including this unit from

another room (p.70).

D TRIGGER OUT jack

For connecting a device that supports the trigger function

(p.33).

E AUDIO OUT jacks

For outputting audio to a recording device (tape deck, etc.)

when an analog input (V-AUX, AV5~6 or AUDIO1~2) is

selected (p.32).

F ZONE2 OUT jacks

For connecting external amplifier used in Zone2 to output

audio (p.70).

G PRE OUT jacks

For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an

external power amplifier (p.32).

H AC IN

For connecting the supplied power cable (p.34).

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

SINGLE CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

SURROUND SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK

PRE OUT

SPEAKERS

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

RL R R RLLL

SINGLE

RS-232C

AC IN

A D0

31 4

BC HEF G

En 11

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 MAIN/ZONE2

Switches the zones (main or Zone2) to operate with the

remote control (p.71).

3 SOURCE

Turns on/off an external device.

4 Input selection keys

Select an input source to play back.

HDMI1~7 HDMI1~7 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

AV1~6 AV1~6 jacks

AUDIO AUDIO1~2 jacks (press repeatedly to switch

between “AUDIO1” and “AUDIO2”)

DOCK DOCK jack

TUNER FM/AM radio

PHONO PHONO jacks

NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a

desired network source)

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

5 Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the

input source.

FM Switches to FM radio.

AM Switches to AM radio.

MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.

PRESET Selects a preset station.

TUNING Selects the radio frequency.

6 INFO

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.76).

7 SLEEP

Switches this unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,

off).

8 PARTY

Turns on/off the party mode (p.72).

9 SCENE

Selects the assigned input source and sound program, and

HDMI output at once. Additionally, you can turn on this unit

when it is in standby mode (p.44).

0 ON SCREEN

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

A Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

B MODE

Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio reception.

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.57).

C Numeric keys

Enter numerical values such as radio frequencies.

D TV operation keys

Operate TV input, TV volume, etc (p.106).

E CODE SET

Registers remote control codes of external devices on the

remote control (p.106).

F SOURCE/RECEIVER

Switches the devices (this unit or external device) to operate

with the remote control (p.107). You can operate this unit

when this key lights up in orange, and an external device

when this key lights up in green.

G RECEIVER

Turns on/off (standby) this unit.

H Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.45).

I OPTION

Displays the option menu (p.77).

J VOLUME

Adjusts the volume.

K DISPLAY

Display the status information on the TV (p.76).

L MUTE

Mutes the audio output.

M External device operation keys

Operate playback and menu display etc. for external

devices (p.107).

N HDMI OUT

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.43).

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a

remote control code for each device in advance (p.106).

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PART Y

MOVIE MUSIC

DVD

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

123 4

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

123 4

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

En 12

SETUP

Now all the preparations are complete. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio, etc. with this unit!

General setup procedure

1 Placing speakers (p.13)

Select the speaker layout depending on the number of speakers and place the speakers in your room.

2 Connecting speakers (p.17)

Connect the speakers to this unit.

3 Connecting a TV (p.21)

Connect a TV to this unit.

4 Connecting playback devices (p.26)

Connect video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) and audio devices (CD players, etc.) to this unit.

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.30)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to this unit.

6 Connecting to the network (p.31)

Connect this unit to the network.

7 Connecting other devices (p.32)

Connect external devices such as an external power amplifier and recording devices.

8 Connecting the power cable (p.34)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.35)

Select a desired on-screen menu language (default: English).

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.36)

Optimize the speaker settings such as volume balance and acoustic parameters to suit your room (YPAO).

En 13

Select the speaker layout depending on the number of speakers and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the

representative speaker layout examples.

• For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.118).

• If you have 7 speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers. To reinforce the rear right/left sounds, use them as surround back speakers.

To create a natural stereoscopic sound field, use them as presence speakers.

• 2 subwoofers connected to this unit output same sounds.

1 Placing speakers

Caution

• This unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers at the factory. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance of this unit to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For

details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.16).

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Speaker system (the number of channels)

7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1

Front (L)

Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).

● ●●●●●●●

Front (R) ● ●●●●●●●

Center Produces center channel sounds (dialogs, vocals, etc). ●●●●● ●

Surround (L)

Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when

no surround back speakers are connected.

● ●●●●●

Surround (R) ● ●●●●●

Surround back (L)

Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.

●●

Surround back (R) ●●

Surround back Produces mixed-down surround back right/left channel sounds. ●

Presence (L)

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48), the presence speakers create a

natural stereoscopic sound field in your room.

●●

Presence (R) ●●

Subwoofer

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to this unit.

● ●●●●●●●

Speaker placement

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 14

7.1+2 channel system 7.1 channel system (using surround back speakers)

7.1 channel system (using presence speakers) 6.1 channel system

• The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. This unit

automatically switches the speakers to be used depending on a selected CINEMA DSP (p.46).

Speaker placement

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 15

5.1 channel system 4.1 channel system

3.1 channel system 2.1 channel system

Speaker placement

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 16

■ Setting the speaker impedance

This unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers at the factory. When connecting 6-ohm

speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use

4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the supplied power cable to

this unit and then to an AC wall outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE .

Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE to set this unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

Now you are ready to connect the speakers.

MAIN ZONE

STRAIGHT

SPIMP.-8MIN

Speaker placement

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 17

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Here are connections of 7.1+2, 7.1 and 6.1 channel

system as examples. If you select another system,

connect speakers while referring to the connection of

6.1 channel system.

Cables necessary for connection (commercially

available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (2 for connecting 2 subwoofers)

7.1+2 channel system 7.1 channel system

(using surround back speakers)

2 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Remove the power cable of this unit from an AC wall outlet and

turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.

• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch

anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit.

This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker

cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES” will appear on the

front display when this unit is turned on.

–

This unit (rear) This unit (rear)

1 2

Speaker connections

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 18

7.1 channel system

(using presence speakers)

6.1 channel system

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it

to the SINGLE jack (L side).

This unit (rear)

1 2

Speaker connections

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 19

■ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the

negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the

other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored

to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the

negative and the other wire to the positive.

a Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the

ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the

cable together firmly.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side

(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

■ Connecting the subwoofer

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

Connecting front speakers that

support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp

connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks.

To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”

(p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after

connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

FRONT

+ (red)

– (black)

Audio pin cable

This unit (rear)

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or

cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the

instruction manual of the speakers for details. When not making

bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are

connected before connecting the speaker cables.

• When using bi-amp connections, surround back speakers

cannot be used.

1 2

Speaker connections

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 20

■ Video/audio jacks

HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.

• To connect a device that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is

required.

• The HDMI jacks of this unit support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D video transmission (through output)

features.

■ Video jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),

and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

S VIDEO jack

Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)

and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video

cable.

VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable.

Input/output jacks and cables

HDMI cable

Component video cable

S-video cable

Video pin cable

Digital Optical cable

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

En 21

Connect a TV to this unit so that videos input to this unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on this unit.

The connection method varies depending on functions and video input jacks available

on your TV.

Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.

■

Connection method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to this unit with an HDMI cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.96) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• If you make an HDMI connection between your TV and this unit, any videos input to this unit can be output

to the TV no matter how you connect video devices to this unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.25).

3 Connecting a TV

About HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV

that supports HDMI Control to this unit with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit

(power, volume, etc.) in conjunction with TV remote control operations. You can also

control playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player, etc.)

connected to this unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.123).

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. So if you connect

a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to this unit with a single HDMI cable, you

can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to this unit.

Does your TV support

Audio Return Channel (ARC)?

Does your TV support

HDMI Control?

Does your TV have an

HDMI input jack?

■ Connection method 3 (p.24)

■ Connection method 2 (p.23)

■ Connection method 1 (p.21)

■ Connection method 4 (p.25)

Yes

COMPONENT

VIDEO

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

(

MONITOR O

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI

HDMI OUT 1 jack

HDMI input

(ARC-compatible)

This unit

(rear)

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 22

Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operations of your TV, refer to the instruction manual of the

TV.

After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and

power cable of this unit, turn on this unit, TV and playback devices.

Configure the settings of this unit.

a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.

b Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.

c Press ON SCREEN.

d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

e Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI”.

f Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

h Press ON SCREEN.

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/

DVD player, etc).

b Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off this unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the main power of the TV and then turn on this unit and playback devices.

d Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.

e Check the followings.

On this unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

Now the necessary settings are complete.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of this unit will

be automatically switched to “AV4” and the TV audio will be played back on this unit.

If TV audio cannot be heard, check that “ARC” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“On”.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and re-plugging) the

devices. It may solve the problem.

• If any audio interruption happens while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and

use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to this unit (p.23).

• “AV4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV4

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To

use the SCENE function (p.44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

RETURN

VOLUME

ENTER

TOP

POP UP

DISPLAY

OPTION

ON SCREEN

RETURN

POP U

DISPLA

PTI

DIS

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 23

■ Connection method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to this unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.96) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• If you make an HDMI connection between your TV and this unit, any videos input to this unit can be output

to the TV no matter how you connect video devices to this unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.25).

Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operations of your TV, refer to the instruction manual of the

TV.

After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and

power cable of this unit, turn on this unit, TV and playback devices.

Configure the settings of this unit.

a Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.

b Press ON SCREEN.

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

d Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI”.

e Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

(

MONITOR O

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI

AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

HDMI

This unit

(rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AV4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output

(digital optical)

HDMI input

RETURN

VOLUME

ENTER

TOP

POP UP

DISPLAY

OPTION

ON SCREEN

RETURN

POP U

DISPLA

PTI

DIS

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 24

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/

DVD player, etc).

b Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off this unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the main power of the TV and then turn on this unit and playback devices.

d Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.

e Check the followings.

On this unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

Now the necessary settings are complete.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of this unit will

be automatically switched to “AV4” and the TV audio will be played back on this unit.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and re-plugging) the

devices. It may solve the problem.

• “AV4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV4

jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV

Audio Input” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE

function (p.44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

■ Connection method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)

Connect the TV to this unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.

If switch the input source of this unit to “AV4” by pressing AV4 or SCENE(TV), the TV

audio will be played back on this unit.

• If you make an HDMI connection between your TV and this unit, any videos input to this unit can be output

to the TV no matter how you connect video devices to this unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.25).

• If you have connected any external device to the AV4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other

than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV1~6 and AUDIO1~2 jacks. To use

the SCENE function (p.44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

COMPONENT

VIDEO

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

(

MONITOR O

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI

OPTICAL

HDMI

AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

This unit

(rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AV4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output

(digital optical)

HDMI input

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 25

■ Connection method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)

Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following

connections.

If you select “AV4” as the input source by pressing AV4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio will

be played back on this unit.

• If you connect your TV to this unit with a cable other than HDMI, videos input to this unit via HDMI cannot

be output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to

Analog Conversion” setting. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122).

• If you have connected any external device to the AV4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other

than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV1~6 and AUDIO1~2 jacks. To use

the SCENE function (p.44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

This unit has 2 HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to this unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TVs (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.43).

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

0.1

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGE

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REM

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

This unit

(rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video input

(component video)

AV4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output

(digital optical)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI

(BD/DV

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

This unit

(rear)

MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO) jack

Video input

(composite video)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

MONITOR O

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI

This unit

(rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

Projector

TV (already connected)

1 2 3

TV connection

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

En 26

This unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod, a Bluetooth component or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

- Connecting an iPod (p.54)

- Connecting a Bluetooth receiver (p.59)

- Connecting a USB storage device (p.61)

Connecting video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles

to this unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device,

choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the

video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Videos input to this unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to this unit with a cable other than

HDMI.

• If the combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on this unit does not match your video device,

change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.28).

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to this unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing HDMI1~7, the video/audio played back on

the video device will be output from this unit.

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to this unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on this unit) depending

on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV1~2, the video/audio played back on the

video device will be output from this unit.

4 Connecting playback devices

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

AUDIO 2

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

SINGLE CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

SURROUND SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK

PRE OUT

SPEAKERS

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI–AMP Z

R LRR RLL

SINGLE

RS-232C

HDMI

HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2

This unit

(rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI1~7 jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on this unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital optical AV1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

This unit (rear)

AV1~2

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(digital optical or digital

coaxial)

AV1(OPTICAL) jack or

AV2(COAXIAL) jack

1 2 3 4

Playback device connections

5 6 7 8 9 10

En 27

■ S-video connection

Connect a video device to this unit with an S-video cable and a stereo pin cable.

If you select the input source by pressing AV5, the video/audio played back on the

video device will be output from this unit.

• When video signals are input through the S VIDEO jack and VIDEO jack of the AV5 jack at the same time,

priority is given to the signals input through the S VIDEO jack.

• Analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog Conversion” setting.

For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122).

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to this unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on this unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV3~6, the video/audio played back on the

video device will be output from this unit.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on this unit

Video Audio

S-video Analog stereo AV5 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AUDIO

S VIDEO

AV 5

This unit (rear)

AV5 (S VIDEO)

jack

Video output

(S-video)

Audio output

(analog stereo)

Video device

AV5 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on this unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV5 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

AV6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

This unit (rear)

AV3~6(VIDEO)

jack

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital optical,

digital coaxial, analog stereo)

Any of AV3(COAXIAL) jack,

AV4(OPTICAL) jack,

AV5~6(AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3 4

Playback device connections

5 6 7 8 9 10

En 28

■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks

If the combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on this unit does not match your

video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. It

enables you to connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.

Necessary setting

For example, if you have connected a video device to AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and

AV5 (AUDIO) jacks of this unit, change the combination setting as follows.

After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and

power cable of this unit, turn on this unit and TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be

used) and press the cursor key ( ).

Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used).

Press ON SCREEN.

Now the necessary setting is complete.

If you select “AV2” as the input source by pressing AV2, the video/audio played

back on the video device will be output from this unit.

Output jacks on video device Input jacks on this unit

Video Audio Video Audio

HDMI

Digital optical HDMI1~7

AV1 (OPTICAL)

AV4 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial HDMI1~7 AV2~3 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo HDMI1~7

AV5~6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1~2

Component video Analog stereo

AV1~2

(COMPONENT

VIDEO)

AV5~6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO1~2

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

AV 5

AUDIO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

AV5 (AUDIO) jacks

Video device

Audio output

(analog stereo)

This unit (rear)

1 2 3 4

Playback device connections

5 6 7 8 9 10

En 29

Connecting audio devices (CD players, etc.)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players and a turntable to this unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

If you select the input source by pressing AV1~6, AUDIO1~2 or PHONO, the audio

played back on the audio device will be output from this unit.

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a

game console and a camcorder to this unit.

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume of

this unit.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from this unit.

• If you connect video devices to both the HDMI IN jack and VIDEO/AUDIO jacks, this unit outputs video/

audio input through the HDMI IN jack.

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on this unit

Digital optical

AV1 (OPTICAL)

AV4 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial AV2~3 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AV5~6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO1~2

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

MONITOR O

PHONO

GND

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

Audio output

(any of digital optical, digital coaxial,

analog stereo)

AV1~6 jacks

AUDIO1~2 jacks

This unit (rear)

Audio device

PHONO jacks

Audio output (PHONO)

Turntable

HDMI INVIDEO L AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

STRAIGHT

TONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

USB

iPod/iPhone

PROGRAM

V RL

HDMI

Game console

Camcorder

This unit (front)

1 2 3 4

Playback device connections

5 6 7 8 9 10

En 30

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to this unit.

Assembling and connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind the antenna cable from the AM antenna unit only the length needed.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

SINGLE CENTER

SPEAKERS

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI–AMP ZONE

R LRR RLL

SINGLE

RS-232C

FM antenna

AM antenna

This unit (rear)

Hold down Insert Release

1 2 3 4 5

FM/AM antenna connections

6 7 8 9 10

En 31

Connect this unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on PCs and DLNA servers such as

Network Attached Storage (NAS) on this unit.

• When using a router that supports the DHCP function, the network parameters (IP address, etc.) will be

automatically assigned to this unit without configuring the network settings of this unit. If your router does

not support the DHCP function or you want to configure the network parameters manually, configure the

network settings (p.97).

• You can check whether the network parameters (IP address, etc.) are properly assigned to this unit in

“Network” (p.102) in the “Information”.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of your network devices (such as a

router) may block the access of this unit to the network devices or the Internet. In such cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• You can connect this unit to up to 16 music servers (PC, etc.), and each server must be connected to the

same subnet as this unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

6 Connecting to the network

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

This unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Network connections

7 8 9 10

En 32

Connecting an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker

output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of this unit.

The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

1 FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

2 SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

3 SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

4 SUBWOOFER1~2 jacks

For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same

sound is output from them.

5 CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

Connecting video/audio recording devices

You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks.

These jacks output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.

• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV5~6 jacks or V-AUX (VIDEO/

AUDIO) jacks of this unit.

• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV5~6 jacks, AUDIO1~2 jacks or V-

AUX (AUDIO) jacks of this unit.

7 Connecting other devices

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5

OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

SINGLE CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

SURROUND SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK

PRE OUT

SPEAKERS

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

R LRR RLLL

SINGLE

RS-232C

AC IN

1 2 3 4

This unit (rear)

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

ZONE 2

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

FRONT CEN

R L

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

(rear)

AV OUT jacks

Video/audio input

Video recording device

Audio recording

device

Audio input

AUDIO OUT jacks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Other connections

8 9 10

En 33

Connecting a device compatible

with SCENE link playback (remote connection)

If you have a Yamaha product that has the capability of the SCENE control signal

transmission, you can control the Yamaha product in conjunction with a scene selection

(p.44) by connecting it to the REMOTE OUT jack with a monaural mini-jack cable.

• If you connect a Yamaha product compatible with SCENE link playback to the REMOTE OUT jack, you can

start playback on the Yamaha product in conjunction with a scene selection (p.44). To enable the SCENE

link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.84) in the “Scene” menu.

• You also connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to operate devices in the main zone from Zone2 (p.70).

Connecting a device compatible

with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operations

(power-on/off, input selection, etc.) on this unit. If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu.

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

ZONE 2

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

FRONT CEN

R L

OUT

REMOTE

This unit

(rear)

REMOTE OUT jack

Yamaha product

(DVD player, etc.)

Remote input

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

ZONE 2

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

FRONT CEN

R L

TRIGGER OUT

+12V

0.1A MAX.

This unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT jack

System connection

input

Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Other connections

8 9 10

En 34

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to this unit

and then to an AC wall outlet.

8 Connecting the power cable

I 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7

SINGLE CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2

OUT

DIO

SURROUND SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK

PRE OUT

SPEAKERS

CENTER SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

LRR RLLL

SINGLE

RS-232C

AC IN

To an AC wall outlet

This unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Power cable connection

9 10

En 35

Select a desired on-screen menu language from English (default),

Japanese, French, German, Spanish and Russian.

Press RECEIVER to turn on this unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

the video from this unit.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “Language” and

the cursor keys ( / ) to select a desired language.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7 856

123 4

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

123 4

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RECEIVER

ON SCREEN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Language setting

Cursor keys

En 36

By using the Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO)

function, this unit automatically detects speaker connections and

distances from the listening position, and optimizes the speaker

settings such as volume balance and acoustic parameters to suit

your room.

Please note the following when using YPAO.

• Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to this unit.

• During the measuring process, the test tones are output at high volume. Take care

that the test tone does not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this

function at night when it may be a nuisance to others.

• During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

• During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.

• Do not connect headphones.

• If your subwoofer supports the auto-standby function, disable it.

Press RECEIVER to turn on this unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

the video from this unit.

Turned on the subwoofer and set the volume to half.

If the cross-over frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

Place the YPAO microphone at ear height in your

listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC

jack on the front panel.

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

This unit (front)

YPAO microphone

Listening position

Ear height

Place the YPAO microphone at ear

height in your listening position. We

recommend using a tripod to adjust the

height. You can use the tripod screws to

fix the microphone in place.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP

URE DIRE

DMI

INF

RADI

MUTE

ENTER

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

USB

NIN

RECEIVER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

En 37

The following screen appears on the TV.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

If desired, change the measuring method (multi/

single).

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

Settings

• If you perform the single measure, you will be able to enjoy surround sound at that

position with optimized speaker settings. If you perform the multi measure, the

speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider

space.

Now all preparations are complete. See the following page to start

the measurement.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.39)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.38)

Yes

Select this if your listening position is variable or you

will enjoy surround sound with your company. You can

perform the measurement at up to 8 positions to

optimize the speaker settings to suit all of those

positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this if your listening position is fixed in one

position. You will perform the measurement only once

to optimize the speaker settings suit to the position

(single measure).

Single measure

1 2

3 5

123

Multi measure

(5 listening positions)

Multi measure

(2 listening positions + front/back)

Multi measure

(1 listening position + 4 circumferences)

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

En 38

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below to

make the measurement.

• YPAO measurement is not performed correctly when any obstacles are in the

room.

• During the measuring process (about 3 minutes), keep stuff in the corners or

remove it from the room.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)

appears, see “Error messages” (p.41) or “Warning messages” (p.42).

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.40).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The corrected speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from this unit.

Now optimization of the speaker settings is complete.

Caution

• Since the YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, do not place the microphone

in any place where it will be subjected to direct sunlight or high temperatures

(top of an AV equipment, etc).

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

En 39

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below to

make the measurement.

• YPAO measurement is not performed correctly when any obstacles are in the

room.

• During the measuring process, keep stuff in the corners or remove it from the

room. It takes about 10 minutes to make the measurement at 8 listening positions.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.41) or “Warning messages” (p.42).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat step 2 until the measurement at all listening

positions (up to 8) are made.

If the measurement at all listening position are

made, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and

press ENTER.

If you have made the measurement at 8 listening positions,

the following screen appears automatically.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.40).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The corrected speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from this unit.

Now optimization of the speaker settings is complete.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

En 40

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Result” and press ENTER.

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu. In

this case, the previous measurement results are displayed.

The following screen appears.

1 Measurement result items

2 Measurement result details

3 The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed)

Use the cursor keys to select an item

• A speaker with any problem is indicated with a red-boxed message.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto

Setup” and then “Result” (p.88).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Caution

• Since the YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, do not place the microphone

in any place where it will be subjected to direct sunlight or high temperatures

(top of an AV equipment, etc).

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the

correct polarity (+/-).

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with

the reversed polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

En 41

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off this unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP Either of surround speakers is not detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP Either of presence speakers is not detected.

E-4: SBRSBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off this unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

“PROCEED”, the measurement starts again on the condition this unit ignores the noisy error even if noises

are detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Any surround back speaker is connected while no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers should be connected when using surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

instructions to exit YPAO, turn off this unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again.

E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on this unit. If this error occurs repeatedly,

contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

En 42

Warning messages

Even if any warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again to use this unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1: Out of Phase

Any of the speaker cables may be connected with the

reversed polarity (+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.40) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker indicated with

“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off this unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly.

W-2: Over Distance

Any of the speakers is placed more than 24 m from the

listening position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.40) and move the speaker indicated with “>24.0m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m of

the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are a significant volume differences between the

speakers.

Check the use environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer.

We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with as similar specifications as possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Automatic speaker setup

En 43

PLAYBACK

Turn on external devices (TV, BD/DVD player, etc.)

connected to this unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device, or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual of the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

- Listening to FM/AM radio (p.50)

- Playing back iPod music/videos (p.54)

- Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.59)

- Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.61)

- Playing back music stored on PCs (p.64)

- Listening to Internet radio (p.67)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust treble/bass parts of sound, use the “Option” menu or TONE

CONTROL on the front panel (p.78).

On-screen input selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a desired input source and press

ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output switches.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.44).

• When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, this unit outputs video signals at the

highest resolution that both TVs connected to this unit support. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack, and a

720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, this unit outputs 720p video signals.)

Basic playback procedure

HDMI OUT 1+2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

HDMI OUT 1

Outputs the signals at the selected HDMI OUT

jack.

HDMI OUT 2

HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

HDMIOUT1+2

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

PTI

NIN

ENTER

VOLUME

MUTE

HDMI OUT

ON SCREEN

Input selection keys

Cursor keys

En 44

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,

sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI

output jack at once.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. This unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

On-screen scene selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press

ENTER.

Configuring scene assignments

Perform the following operations to prepare the

settings you want to assign to a scene.

- Select an input source (p.43)

- Select a sound program (p.45)

- Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49)

- Select an HDMI output jack (p.43)

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

If you want to control the corresponding playback

device after selecting the scene, hold down the

corresponding SCENE key and input selection key

together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/

RECEIVER blinks twice.

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device

yet, see “Setting the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.107) to

• You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.83).

• You can start playback of external devices connected to this unit via HDMI

or a Yamaha product connected to the REMOTE OUT jack, in conjunction

with a scene selection (SCENE link playback). To enable the SCENE link

playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.84) in the “Scene”

menu.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings at once (SCENE)

SCENE Input

Sound

program

Compressed

Music

Enhancer

HDMI output

jack

BD/DVD HDMI1 MOVIE (Drama) Off HDMI OUT 1+2

TV AV4 STRAIGHT On HDMI OUT 1+2

CD AV3 STRAIGHT Off HDMI OUT 1+2

RADIO TUNER

MUSIC

(7ch Stereo)

On HDMI OUT 1+2

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

SCENE

SOURCE/RECEIVER

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

En 45

This unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with a

favorite sound mode (sound field effect, stereo playback, etc).

Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.46)

Press MOVIE repeatedly.

Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo

playback (p.47)

Press MUSIC repeatedly.

Selecting a surround decoder (p.48)

Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

Switching to the straight decode mode (p.48)

Press STRAIGHT.

Switching to the Pure Direct mode (p.49)

Press PURE DIRECT.

Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49)

Press ENHANCER.

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press

ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the “Sound Program” menu (p.85).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• When you play back audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz

or DTS Express sources, the straight decode mode (p.48) is automatically

selected.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound with the speaker

indicators on the front panel (p.9) or the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information”

menu (p.101).

Selecting the sound mode

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

LEEP

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

MOVIE

MUSIC

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

En 46

Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)

This unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original

DSP technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual

movie theaters or concert halls in your room.

• When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources such as movies,

TV programs and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

Standard

This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right and rear.

Spectacle

This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie

productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches

cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range

providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive

sounds.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a

variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action

and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts

emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and

right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the

separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.

SL SR

Sci-Fi

VOL .

SBL SBR

Sound program category

Sound program

“CINEMA DSP” lights up

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing

effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words

and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after

long hours of viewing.

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a

classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program

produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to

create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.

Sports

This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and

studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the

voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the

center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to

offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting

games and FPS games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects

makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing

for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with

Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects and dialog from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer

for a more clear and spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop,

rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space

thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals

and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround

sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

En 47

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources such as

music CDs.

You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

❑ LIVE/CLUB

❑ STEREO

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in

Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for

European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,

creating a calming atmosphere. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left

of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert

hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate

carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club

This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey

atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the

listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a rock music live house in Los

Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener's virtual seat is at the

center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. When

multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilizes CINEMA DSP).

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback

multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

En 48

■ Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

CINEMA DSP 3D enables to create a natural stereoscopic sound

field in your room.

CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions

are met.

- One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is

selected (p.46).

- “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.78) in the “Option” menu is set to

“On” (default).

• We recommend using presence speakers to have a full effect of the stereoscopic

sound fields. However, this unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the

front, center and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields even

when no presence speakers are connected.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and

7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, this unit

automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side

speakers.

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Enjoying unprocessed sounds in original

channels (straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, each speaker

produces each channel audio signal directly (without sound field

processing). When you play back 2-channel sources such as CD,

stereo sound is heard from the front speakers. When you play back

multi-channel sources, this unit produces unprocessed multi-

channel sounds.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

■ Enjoying unprocessed multi-channel

sounds (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multi-channel

playback from 2-channel sources. When a multi-channel source is

input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.

For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.119).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

switches.

PL PR

SL SR

Hall in Vienna

VOL .

SBL SBR

“CINEMA DSP ” lights up

Pro Logic

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for any

sources.

PLIIx Movie

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.

PLII Movie

SL SR

STRAIGHT

VOL.

SBL SBR

ProLogic

SL SR

VOL .

SBL SBR

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

ENTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

En 49

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound

(Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, this unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry to reduce the electrical

noise from other circuitry (front display, etc). It allows you to enjoy

Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

- Selecting sound programs

- Adjusting the tone control

- Operating the on-screen menu

- Viewing information on the front display (when not operated)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer improves the sound enhancer near

to the original depth and width of compressed music sources. This

function can be used along with any other sound modes.

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.

- Signals of which sampling rate is over 48kHz

- High-definition streaming audio

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.79) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

Enjoying surround sound with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects like a multi-channel

speaker system with stereo headphones by connecting the

headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program

or a surround decoder.

PLIIx Music

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music.

PLII Music

PLIIx Game

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games.

PLII Game

Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.

Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

PUREDIRECT

SL SR

ENHANCER

Enhancer On

VOL.

SBL SBR

“ENHANCER” lights up

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

LEEP

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

ENTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

En 50

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or

selecting from registered radio stations.

• If you cannot have a good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/

AM antennas.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press FM or AM to select a band.

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency.

Hold down the key for about a second to search the station

automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

receivable range

• You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception by

pressing MODE. When signal reception for FM radio station is unstable,

switching to monaural may improve it.

Registering favorite radio stations (preset)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you

registered stations, you can easily tune into those stations by

selecting the preset number.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals using “Auto

Preset” (p.53).

■ Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.50)

to tune into a desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The radio station will be registered to the preset number

“01” for the first time. After that, it will be registered to an

empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset

number).

• To select a preset number to which the station will be registered, press

MEMORY once after tuning into a desired radio station, use PRESET or

numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

Listening to FM/AM radio

SL SR

FM87.50MHz

VOL.

SBL SBR

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

SBL SBR

FM98.50MHz

VOL.

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

01:FM98.50MHz

VOL.

SBL SBR

Preset number

SL SR

STEREO

TUNED

02:Empty

VOL.

SBL SBR

“Empty” (not in use) or frequency currently registered

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

ENTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

ENT

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

MODE

TUNER

Numeric keys

En 51

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting the preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.53).

Radio Data System tuning

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data

System data such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio

Text” and “Clock Time” when tuning into a Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

■ Displaying the Radio Data System

information

Tune into a desired Radio Data System broadcasting

station.

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.53).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the display item switches.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information

appears.

STEREO

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

SBL SBR

01:FM98.50MHz

PRESET

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Type of the current program

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

Frequency Frequency

STEREO

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

SBL SBR

ProgramType

INFO

Item name

STEREO

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

SBL SBR

CLASSICS

9850

Information

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

MEM

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

ENTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

TUNER

INFO

PRESET

Numeric keys

En 52

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time” do not

appear when the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

■ Receiving traffic information

automatically

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, this unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys ( / ) while “READY” is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.51), the

Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”

“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

2 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

3 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

STEREO

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

SBL SBR

TPFM101.30MHz

FINISH

Traffic information station (frequency)

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

OPTION

Cursor keys

En 53

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset

station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

Switches to FM/AM.

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of

the list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 54

You can play back iPod music/videos on this unit using a USB cable supplied with iPod,

an optional Yamaha iPod dock (such as YDS-12) or an optional Yamaha iPod wireless

system (YID-W10).

• This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” means both “iPod” and “iPhone”

unless the explanation describes exceptions.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or software version of an iPod, or the model

of an iPod dock.

Functional differences depending on the way of connection

* Requires an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied). Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the

Apple Composite AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of this unit and set “Video Out

(USB)” (p.82) in the “Input” menu to “V-AUX”.

Connecting an iPod

■ Using a USB cable

Connect your iPod to this unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

Playing back iPod music/videos

USB cable supplied

with iPod

Yamaha iPod universal

dock

(such as YDS-12)

Yamaha iPod wireless

system

(YID-W10)

Audio output ✓✓✓

Video output ✓* ✓ —

Operation with

remote control of

the unit

✓✓—

Operation with

iPod

✓✓✓

Operation on TV

screen

✓✓—

Charging ✓✓✓

Charging during

standby mode

— ✓✓

Supported iPod

iPod touch

iPod nano (2 gen. to

6 gen.)

iPod classic

iPhone 4

iPhone 3GS

iPhone 3G

iPhone

iPod touch

iPod nano

iPod classic

iPod with video

iPod with color display

iPod with click wheel

iPod mini

iPhone 4

iPhone 3GS

iPhone 3G

iPhone

iPod touch

iPod nano

iPod classic

iPod with video

iPhone 4

iPhone 3GS

iPhone 3G

iPhone

BD/DVD

INPUT

TONE CONTROL

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

USB

iPod/iPhone

PROGRA

This unit (front)

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

Connected

USB

En 55

■ Using an iPod dock

Refer to the instruction manual of the iPod dock in addition.

When this unit is in standby mode, connect the iPod

dock to the DOCK jack.

Locate the iPod dock at the distance as far as from this unit.

Connect your iPod to the iPod dock and turn on this

unit.

• While an iPod is connected to the iPod dock, the iPod is charged. You can

select whether to charge the iPod when this unit is in standby mode using

“Standby Charge” (p.81) in the “Input” menu.

■ Using an iPod wireless system

When using an iPod wireless system, operate your iPod itself to

start playback after making a connection. Refer to the instruction

manual of the iPod wireless system in addition.

When the power cable is removed from an AC wall

outlet, connect the iPod wireless system (receiver)

to the DOCK jack.

Locate the iPod wireless system (receiver) at the distance

as far as from this unit.

Connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

Connect your iPod to the iPod wireless system

(transmitter).

On your iPod, select the content and start playback.

This unit automatically turns on and selects “DOCK” as the

input source.

• You can select whether to control this unit (power on/off, input selection and

volume adjustment) in conjunction with iPod operations using “iPod

Interlock” (p.82) in the “Input” menu. When the iPod interlock function is

disabled, turn on this unit and select the input source manually.

• While the iPod wireless system (transmitter) is placed on the iPod wireless

system (receiver), the iPod is charged. You can select whether to charge the

iPod when this unit is in standby mode using “Standby Charge” (p.81) in the

“Input” menu.

0.1

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMO

DOCK

This unit (rear)

iPod dock

Caution

• When you use iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to this unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, remove the iPod from the iPod

wireless system (transmitter) immediately. To prevent this problem, we

recommend using “Max Volume” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu to set the

maximum volume level for this unit.

0.1

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMO

DOCK

This unit (rear)

iPod wireless system (receiver)

En 56

Playback of iPod contents

When using a USB cable or an iPod dock, you can control the iPod

with the menu displayed on the TV.

• When using an iPod wireless system, you cannot control the iPod from the TV

screen. Operate your iPod itself to select the content and start playback.

When using a USB cable: press USB to select

“USB” as the input source.

When using an iPod dock: press DOCK to select

“DOCK” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

* Display example (when using an iPod dock)

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod itself to select a content or control playback, switch to

the simple play mode (p.57).

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.58) and playback status

(play/pause, etc).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item

and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

PTI

REEN

NET

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

DOCK

USB

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 57

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.58) and playback status

(play/pause, etc).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled.

3 Album image

4 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to

control playback.

■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control

(simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to

start playback.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Operational remote control

keys

Function

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms the selection.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

External

device

operation keys

Starts playback or stops playback

temporarily.

Stops playback.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (while holding

down).

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

MODE

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 58

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

• When using an iPod wireless system, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly

on your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod, or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

When “USB” or “DOCK” is selected as the input

source, press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs

(Songs)

Plays back songs in random order. “ ”

appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order. “ ”

appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“ ” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly. “ ”

appears in the TV screen.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

MODE

OPTION

Cursor keys

En 59

You can play back music stored on a Bluetooth component on this

unit using a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as

YBA-10, optional). Refer to the instruction manuals of the Bluetooth

receiver and your Bluetooth component in addition.

This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of

the Bluetooth profile.

• When connecting your Bluetooth component to the Bluetooth receiver for the first

time, you need to perform “pairing” (mutual recognition for 2 Bluetooth

components). After that, you only need to establish a wireless connection between

those components to play back music via Bluetooth. “Pairing” must be performed

between each combination. So if you have several Bluetooth components, you

need to pair each of your Bluetooth components with the Bluetooth receiver.

Connecting a Bluetooth receiver

When this unit is in standby mode, connect the

Bluetooth receiver to the DOCK jack.

Locate the Bluetooth receiver at the distance as far as from

this unit.

Turn on this unit.

Pairing Bluetooth components

Be sure to perform pairing when connecting a Bluetooth

component to the Bluetooth receiver for the first time, or when the

pairing setting has been deleted.

• The Yamaha Bluetooth receiver (YBA-10) can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth

components. When the ninth component is paired, the pairing setting for the

component which has not been used for the longest period of time will be deleted.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.

Turn on your Bluetooth component and set it to the

pairing mode.

Press OPTION, use the cursor keys to select

“Pairing” (Pairing), and then press ENTER.

Searching starts. If your Bluetooth component recognizes

the Bluetooth receiver, the model name (such as “YBA-10

YAMAHA”) will be displayed in the device list of your

component.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• You can also start the search by holding down MEMORY instead of step 3.

(To cancel the search, press MEMORY again.)

Playing back music via Bluetooth

0.1

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2

AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL

OPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMO

DOCK

This unit (rear)

Bluetooth receiver

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SB SBR

Searching...

DOCK

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

OPTION

DOCK

MEMORY

Cursor keys

En 60

Select the Bluetooth receiver from the device list

and enter the pass key “0000”.

“Completed” appears when the pairing is complete.

• Depending on Bluetooth components, “BT connected” appears when the

pairing is complete. In this case, the wireless connection has been already

established. You just need to start playback on your Bluetooth component to

enjoy it on this unit.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Establishing a wireless connection and

playing back

When the pairing is complete, follow the procedure below to

establish a wireless connection between your Bluetooth component

and the Bluetooth receiver. When the connection is established,

this unit outputs sounds played back on the Bluetooth component.

• Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless connection is established

automatically or by operating the Bluetooth component. In this case, you can skip

steps 2 and 3 below.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Connect” (Connect)

and then press ENTER.

“BT connected” appears when the wireless connection is

established.

• If the Bluetooth receiver is paired with more than one Bluetooth component,

the lastly-connected component is automatically chosen. When you cannot

establish a connection with an intended component, perform pairing again

or perform the connection operation from the intended component.

• “Not found” appears if a connection cannot be established. Check the

followings and try again.

- The Bluetooth component and Bluetooth receiver are paired.

- The Bluetooth component is turned on and the Bluetooth mode is enabled.

- The Bluetooth component is within 10 m of the Bluetooth receiver.

Start playback on your Bluetooth component.

• To terminate the wireless connection, select “Disconnect” (Disconnect) in

step 3.

SL SR

SBL SBR

Completed

DOCK

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

BTconnected

DOCK

VOL.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

OPTION

DOCK

Cursor keys

En 61

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

this unit. Refer to the instruction manuals of the USB storage device

in addition.

This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT

32 format, except USB HDDs).

• This unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC

and FLAC files.

• This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up to 96 kHz for WAV and

FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the

files. In this case, “Loading” appears in the front display.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by this unit are not listed.

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts (p.73) and access them

directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

TONE CONTROL

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

USB

iPod/iPhone

PROGRA

USB

This unit (front)

USB storage device

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

Connected

USB

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

USB

Cursor keys

En 62

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.63) and playback status.

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.63) and playback status.

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled.

3 Album image

4 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys ( , , , ) on the

remote control to control playback.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Play

Control

Stops playback.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 63

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

• The shuffle/repeat settings are shared by USB and network sources.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order. “ ” appears in

the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

Single

(Single)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“ ” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly. “ ” appears in the

TV screen.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

OPTION

Cursor keys

En 64

You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-

compatible NAS on this unit.

• To use this function, this unit and your PC must be connected to the network

properly (p.31). You can check whether the network parameters (IP address, etc.)

are properly assigned to this unit in “Network” (p.102) in the “Information”.

• This unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC

and FLAC files.

• This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up to 96 kHz for WAV and

FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing

of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

Requirements

This unit can play back music files stored on the following music

servers.

- PC with Windows Media Player 11 or later installed

- PC with DLNA/UPnP certificate server software installed

- NAS with DLNA/UPnP certification

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible

NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each

music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player

installed

Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is

installed on your PC.

In the media sharing settings, enable the media

sharing and select this unit as a device to which the

media is shared.

■ For a NAS or a PC with other DLNA sever

software installed

Refer to the instruction manual of the device or software and

configure the media sharing setting.

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

Press NET repeatedly to select “PC” as the input

source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from this unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

Playing back music stored on PCs

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

USB

NIN

ENTER

NET

Cursor keys

En 65

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by this unit are not listed (or cannot be selected even if

listed).

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts (p.73) and access them

directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.66) and playback status

(play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of PC contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Album image

5 Item number/total

6 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.66) and playback status

(play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled.

3 Album image

4 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys ( , , , , ) on the

remote control to control playback.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.82).

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Play

Control

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 66

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of PC

music contents.

• The shuffle/repeat settings are shared by USB and network sources.

When “PC” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order. “ ” appears in

the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

Single

(Single)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“ ” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly. “ ” appears in the

TV screen.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

OPTION

Cursor keys

En 67

You can listen to Internet radio stations using the vTuner Internet

radio station database service particularly customized for this unit,

providing a database of numerous radio stations in the world.

• To use this function, this unit must be connected to the Internet (p.31). You can

check whether the network parameters (IP address, etc.) are properly assigned to

this unit in “Network” (p.102) in the “Information”.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

• Some Internet radio stations may not be played.

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations as shortcuts (p.73) and

access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.

■ Browse screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio contents. Use the cursor keys to select

an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Station art

5 Item number/total

6 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

Listening to Internet radio

Menu Function

Bookmark On Adds the station selected in the list to “Bookmarks”.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 68

• By adding your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can access to

them quickly from “Bookmarks”. To remove stations from “Bookmarks”, select the

station in “Bookmarks” and then “Bookmark Off”.

• You can also register your favorite Internet radio stations by accessing the

following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need

the vTuner ID of this unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account.

You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of this unit) in the “Network” screen

(p.102) in the “Information” menu.

http://yradio.vtuner.com/

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicators

2 Playback information

Displays the station name and elapsed time.

3 Station art

4 Operation menu

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys ( , ) on the remote

control to control playback.

Menu Submenu Function

Bookmark

Adds the current station to “Bookmarks”.

Play

Control

Stops playback.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 69

The multi-zone function allows you to play back separate input

sources in the room where this unit is installed (main zone) and

another room (Zone2).

For example, while you are watching a TV in the living room (main

zone), another person can listen to radio in the bedroom (Zone2).

• Only analog audio signals (including radio, USB and network sources) can be

output to Zone2. To listen to playback sounds of an external device in Zone2, you

need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV5~6, AUDIO1~2 or VIDEO AUX

jacks) of this unit. The party mode (p.72) allows you to enjoy main zone sources in

Zone2 simultaneously regardless of input audio signal types.

Preparing for Zone2

Connect devices to be set in Zone2 to this unit. The connection

method varies depending on an amplifier to use (this unit or

external amplifier).

■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to this unit with speaker

cables.

To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power

Amp Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after

connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.71), the surround back speakers in the main

zone do not output sound.

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

Caution

• Remove the power cable of this unit from an AC wall outlet before connecting

speakers or an external amplifier.

• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come

into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the

speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES” will appear

on the front display when this unit is turned on.

Living room (main zone)

Bedroom (Zone2)

This unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

En 70

■ Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 to this unit with a

stereo pin cable.

■ Operating this unit from Zone2

(remote connection)

By connecting an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the REMOTE

IN/OUT jacks of this unit, you can operate this unit and external

devices from Zone2 with the supplied remote control.

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, register a remote

control code for each device in advance (p.106).

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

75Ω

NNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

HDMI OUT

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

ZONE 2

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

FRONT CE

R L

This unit (rear)

ZONE2 OUT jacks

Zone2

Main zone

External amplifier

Audio input (analog stereo)

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

ORK

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4

(

)

OPTICAL

OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

This unit (rear)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Infrared signal

transmitter

External device

(CD player, etc.)

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Zone2

Main zone

En 71

Remote connections between Yamaha products

If you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections

like this unit, an infrared signal transmitter is unnecessary. You can

transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT

jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal

receiver.

Controlling Zone2

Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.

Press RECEIVER

Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or

disabled.

When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the

front display.

Use the following keys to select an input source.

V-AUX: VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks (on the front panel)

AV5~6: AV5~6 (AUDIO) jacks

AUDIO: AUDIO1~2 jacks (press repeatedly to switch

between “AUDIO1” and “AUDIO2”)

DOCK: DOCK jack

TUNER: FM/AM radio

PHONO: PHONO jacks

NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired

network source

USB: USB jack (on the front panel)

• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For

example, if you select “PC” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main

zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “PC”.

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Yamaha products

(up to 6, including this unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Zone2

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

ENTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

PTI

REEN

NIN

AV5~6

AUDIO

DOCK

TUNER

PHONO

NET

USB

RECEIVER

V-AUX

MAIN/ZONE2

En 72

Start playback on the external device, or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual of the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

- Listening to FM/AM radio (p.50)

- Playing back iPod music (p.54)

- Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.59)

- Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.61)

- Playing back music stored on PCs (p.64)

- Listening to Internet radio (p.67)

• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display

or web control (p.74) to control Zone2.

• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP

repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of

time.

• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (available only when

using the internal amplifier of this unit).

■ Enjoying main zone sources in Zone2

(party mode)

The party mode allows you to enjoy main zone sources in Zone2

simultaneously. During the party mode, stereo playback is

automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you

want to play back main sources as background music in a home

party, etc.

Pr ess PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the

front display.

• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.99) in

the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).

Caution

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

ENTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

SLEEP

PARTY

VOLUME

MUTE

En 73

Registering favorite items (shortcut)

You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as

shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut

numbers.

• You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.67).

■ Registering an item

Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.

Press MEMORY.

• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use

PRESET or numeric keys to select the shortcut number after step 2.

To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.

■ Recalling a registered item

Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

Press NET or USB.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired item.

You can also enter a shortcut number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys.

• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.

- A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected

to this unit.

- A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to

the network.

- The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.

- The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.

• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this

unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you

have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not

recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.

Useful functions

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

01:Empty

MEMORY

Shortcut number (flashes)

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

02:Empty

MEMORY

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

01:USB

RECALL

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

ENTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NIN

MEMORY

PRESET

NET

USB

Numeric keys

En 74

Controlling this unit from the web browser

(web control)

You can control this unit with the web control screen displayed in

the web browser.

• To use this function, this unit and your PC must be connected to the network

properly (p.31).

• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of this

unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software appropriately.

• We recommend using Internet Explorer 7.x or 8.x as a web browser.

• If you set “Network Standby” (p.75) to “On”, you can display the web control

screen even when this unit is in standby mode.

• You can limit access to this unit from the network devices (PCs, etc.) with

the MAC address filter (p.75).

Start the web browser.

Enter the IP address of this unit in the address bar

of the web browser.

You can check the IP address in “Network” (p.102) in the

“Information” menu.

• By adding the IP address of this unit to the bookmark of the browser, you will

be able to open it without entering the IP address from the next time.

However, the IP address of this unit may change if you are using a DHCP

server.

■ Top menu screen

1 CONTROL

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

2 STATUS

Turns on/off the power for each zone, or displays the input source and

volume set for each zone.

3 SETTINGS

Moves to the settings screen.

4 PARTY MO D E

Turns on/off the party mode (p.72).

5 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

6 MAIN VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can

also switch the step for the volume adjustment.

7 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of this unit.

Web browser

Web control

Router This unit

Web control

En 75

■ Control screen

1 PLAY INFO

Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

2 TOP MENU

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 SCENE

Select a scene for the main zone.

4 POWER

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

5 VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You

can also switch the step for the volume adjustment. (These functions are

available only when the internal amplifier of this unit is used.)

6 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of this unit.

■ Settings screen

1 Rename

Edits the friendly name (name for this unit in the network) or the name of

each zone (p.99). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to this unit.

MAC Filter

Sets the MAC address filter (p.98) to limit access to this unit from the

network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to this unit.

Auto Reload

Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On”

(enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of this unit every 5

seconds.

Network Standby

Enables/disables the network standby function (p.98).

Tips 1/ 2

Displays the tips for use of the web control.

Create Link

Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Backup/Recovery

Creates backup of the settings of this unit on the PC, or restores the

settings from the backup.

2 BACK

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of this unit.

En 76

Viewing the current status

■ Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the display item switches.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information

appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. Also, the

display item can be applied separately to each input source group.

■ Viewing the status information on the TV

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Note

• Do not operate this unit during the recovery process (restoring the settings).

Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. When the recovery

finishes, click “OK” to set this unit to standby mode.

• The backup does not contain user information (user account, password, etc.)

or unit-specific information (MAC address, IP address, etc).

Input source group Item

HDMI1~7

V-AUX

AV1~6

AUDIO1~2

PHONO

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound

mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

DSPProgram

INFO

Item name

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

TheRoxytheat

HDMI1

Information

TUNER

Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

* When tuning into a Radio Data System

broadcasting station, Radio Data System data is

also available (p.51).

DOCK

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name) , DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name)

* When using iPod wireless system, Bluetooth

receiver, or during simple play:

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound

mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

USB

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name)

* When iPod is connected via USB, the display item

switches in the same manner as “DOCK”.

NET RADIO

Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

Input

source

Audio

format/

Decoder

Volume

Sound

mode

CINEMA DSP status

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

ENTE

HDMI

P-

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

INFO

DISPLAY

En 77

You can configure the playback-related settings in accordance with a playback source.

Since this menu is operational on the front panel (or on the TV screen), you can easily

configure the settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

Configuring settings in accordance with a playback source (Option menu)

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

ToneControl

OPTION

Item Function Page

Tone Control

(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of sounds.

Adaptive DRC

(Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum)

is adjusted automatically in conjunction with adjusting the

volume level.

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 78

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the vertical position of center sound when presence

speakers are used.

Extended Surround

(EXTD Surround)

Selects the 5.1 to 7.1-channel signal playback method

when surround back speakers are used.

Volume Trim

(Volume Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. 79

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 79

Traffic Program

(TrafficProgram)

Searches for a traffic information station automatically. 52

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.58), USB

storage device (p.63) or PC (p.66).

—

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.58), USB

storage device (p.63) or PC (p.66).

—

Connect/Disconnect

(Connect/Disconnect)

Establishes/terminates a wireless connection between your

Bluetooth component and the Bluetooth receiver.

Pairing

(Pairing)

Performs pairing of your Bluetooth component and the

Bluetooth receiver.

En 78

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of speaker

sounds. When connecting headphones, you can adjust high-frequency range and low-

frequency range of sounds output from headphones.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0db ~ Bypass (Bypass) ~ +6.0dB *0.5dB steps

Default

Bypass (Bypass)

• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well.

Adjusting with the front panel controls

a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is adjusted automatically in

conjunction with adjusting the volume level. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for

listening to playback at low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected,” the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume, and becomes

wide at a high volume.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D

functions according to the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch

Stereo).

Settings

■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the vertical position of center sound such as dialogues when presence

speakers are used. If dialogues are heard from a position lower than the TV screen,

adjust this setting to raise the position.

Setting range

0~5 (higher raises the position)

Default

On (On) Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

Off (Off) (default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

utput

eve

On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Ideal position

En 79

■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers

are used.

Settings

■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range

-6.0dB ~ +6.0dB (0.5dB steps)

Default

0.0dB

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

Default

TUNER, DOCK, (network sources), USB: On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

Auto (Auto) (default)

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a flag for

reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the

signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. When the DTS or DTS-HD signal is

input, the unit reproduces the signal in 7.1-channel regardless of a flag

for surround back channel.

PLIIx Movie

( PLIIxMo)

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround

back speakers are connected.

PLIIx Music

( PLIIxMu)

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two

surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES (EX/ES)

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder, and reproduces

signals in 6.1-channel.

Off (Off) Always reproduces signals in original channels.

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

En 80

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key ( ).

The input source of this unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys ( / ) after step 3.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Item Function Page

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 81

Audio In

Combines the video jack of the selected input source

with an audio jack of others.

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 81

Standby Charge

Selects whether to charge the iPod when this unit is in

standby mode.

iPod Interlock

Selects whether to control this unit in conjunction with

iPod operations.

Video Out

Selects a video to be output with the audio input

source.

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital

Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.

En 81

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

HDMI1~7, AV1~6, V-AUX, AUDIO1~2, PHONO, USB, DOCK

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an icon and press the cursor key ( ).

Press ENTER, use the cursor keys to rename, and then press ENTER again.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Audio In

Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For

example, use this function in the following cases.

• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output but not HDMI audio output

• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks

(game consoles, etc.)

Input sources

HDMI1~7, AV1~2

■ Setup procedure

(To input audio through a digital optical jack)

Select “AV1” or “AV4”, and connect the device to the corresponding audio jacks of this

unit with a digital optical cable.

(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)

Select “AV2” or “AV3”, and connect the device to the corresponding audio jacks of this

unit with a digital coaxial cable.

(To input audio through analog audio jacks)

Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the

corresponding audio jacks of this unit with a stereo pin cable.

■ Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.

For example, if this unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder

Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources

HDMI1~7, AV1~4, V-AUX

Settings

■ Standby Charge

Selects whether to charge the iPod connected to the iPod dock or iPod wireless system

when this unit is in standby mode.

Input sources

DOCK (iPod)

Settings

Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

On (default) Charges the iPod even when this unit is in standby mode.

Off Does not charge the iPod when this unit is in standby mode.

En 82

■ iPod Interlock

Selects whether to control this unit in conjunction with operations of the iPod connected

to the iPod wireless system.

Input sources

DOCK (iPod)

• This function is available only when an iPod wireless system is connected to this unit.

❑ Power & Input

Selects whether to control the power and input source selection of this unit in

conjunction with iPod operations.

Settings

• When “Power & Input” is set to “On”, the iPod connected to the iPod wireless system is charged regardless

of the “Standby Charge” setting (p.81).

❑ Volume

Selects whether to control the volume of this unit in conjunction with iPod operations.

Settings

■ Video Out

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Input sources

TUNER, (network sources), USB

Settings

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of this unit from DMCs (Windows Media Player 12,

etc.) on the same network.

On (default)

Enables power and input interlocking controls. When you start

playback of the iPod, this unit turns on and “DOCK” is selected as the

input source. When you stop playback, this unit enters standby mode

after a short time.

Off Disables power and input interlocking controls.

On (default)

Enables volume interlocking controls. When you adjust the iPod

volume, the volume of the unit is also adjusted.

Off Disables volume interlocking control.

Off (default) Does not output videos.

HDMI1~7, AV1~6,

V-AUX

Outputs videos input through the corresponding video input jacks.

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.

En 83

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.44) using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a scene to be configured and press the

cursor key ( ).

• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys ( / ) after step 3.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

■ Save

Registers the settings currently applied to this unit (input source, sound program/

surround decoder and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack) to

the selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.44).

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

Item Function Page

Save

Registers the settings currently applied to this unit to the

selected scene.

Load

Loads the settings registered to selected scene. You can

also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the

scene assignments.

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 84

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 84

En 84

■ Load

Loads the settings registered to selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

❑ Device Control

Enables to start playback of external devices connected to this unit via HDMI or a

Yamaha product connected to the REMOTE OUT jack, in conjunction with a scene

selection (SCENE link playback)

Settings

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (CD): IR: Yamaha CD

SCENE4 (RADIO): Off

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI

Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.123).

❑ Detail

Displays the assignments of the selected scene.

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an icon and press the cursor key ( ).

Press ENTER, use the cursor keys to rename, and then press ENTER again.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.44) for the selected scene.

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if

HDMI Control-compatible device (BD/DVD players, etc.) is connected

to this unit via HDMI. It also turns on the HDMI Control-compatible TV

concurrently.

IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1

Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this

if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.

IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 2

Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this

if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack and

“IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1” does not work properly.

IR: Yamaha CD

Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this

if a Yamaha CD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.

Input Input source to be used

HDMI Output HDMI OUT jack to be used

Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used

Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off

En 85

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key ( ).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys ( / ) after step 3.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring sound programs/surround

decoders (Sound Program menu)

En 86

Sound Program menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.

■ Settings for sound programs

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.

• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

Item Function Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used

in combination with the selected sound

program.

PLIIx Movie ( PLII

Movie), Neo:6 Cinema

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.

-6dB ~ +3dB (default: 0dB)

Higher to enhance the

sound field effect and lower

to reduce.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and presence sound field

generation.

1ms ~ 99ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect and lower to reduce.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround sound field

generation.

1ms ~ 49ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect and lower to reduce.

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround back sound field

generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

presence sound field.

0.1 ~ 2.0

Higher to enhance the

broadening effect and lower

to reduce.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround sound field.

Surround Back Room

Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

field.

0 ~ 10

Higher to enhance the

reflectivity and lower to

reduce.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound

field.

Surround Back

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back

sound field.

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0s ~ 5.0s

Higher to enrich the

reverberant sound and

lower to have clear sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and rear reverberant sound

generation.

0 ms ~ 250ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect and lower to reduce.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant

sound.

0% ~ 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound and

lower to weaken.

Sound

program

Item Function Settings

2ch Stereo Direct

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the DSP

and tone control circuits when

an analog audio source is

played back.

Auto (default), Off

Select “Auto” to

bypass the circuits

(when both “Treble”

and “Bass” are set to

“Bypass”).

7ch Stereo

Center Level

Adjusts the volume of the

center channel.

0% ~ 100%

(default: 100%)

Surround L Level

Adjusts the volume of the

surround left channel.

Surround R Level

Adjusts the volume of the

surround right channel.

Surround Back Level

Adjusts the volume of the

surround back channel.

0% ~ 100%

(default: 50%)

Surround Back L

Level

Adjusts the volume of the

surround back left channel.

0% ~ 100%

(default: 35%)

Surround Back R

Level

Adjusts the volume of the

surround back right channel.

Front Presence L Level

Adjusts the volume of the front

presence left channel.

0% ~ 100%

(default: 33%)

Front Presence R Level

Adjusts the volume of the front

presence right channel.

Item Function Settings

En 87

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “Surround Decoder”

to “PLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”.

Decode Type Item Function Settings

PLIIx Music

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off (default), On

Select “On” to wrap front right/left

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 ~ 7 (default: 3)

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect and lower to reduce (closer

to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 ~ +3 (default: 0)

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to

strengthen the surround sound

field.

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 ~ 1.0 (default: 0.3)

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

En 88

You can configure the various functions of this unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a menu.

Use the cursor keys

(/)

to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En 89

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Auto Setup Optimizes the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). 36

Manual Setup

Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 91

Configuration

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 91

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 91

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and its size. 91

Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and its size. 92

Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 92

Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 92

Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 92

Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component produced from speakers of which the size is set to “Small”. 92

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 92

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 93

Parametric EQ

PEQ Select Selects a type of equalizer to be used. 93

PEQ Data Copy Copies the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment. 93

Test Tone Enables/disabled the test tone output. 93

Sound

Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. 94

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 94

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume so that sound is not too loud. 94

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 94

Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level in conjunction with volume adjustments. 94

Video

Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks. 95

Processing Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 95

HDMI

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (ARC, TV audio input, etc). 96

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 97

Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when this unit is in standby mode. 97

Network

IP Address Configures the network parameters (IP address, etc). 97

Network Standby Selects whether or not to turn on this unit by the command from other network devices. 98

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to this unit from other network devices. 98

En 90

Multi Zone

Zone2 Set

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume so that sound is not too loud. 98

Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when this unit is turned on. 98

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 99

Zone Rename Changes the zone names displayed on the TV screen. 99

Function

Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for auto-standby. 99

Display Set

Front Panel Display

Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 99

Scroll Sets the scrolling manner of the front display. 99

Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when this unit is operated. 100

Wall Paper Selects a wall paper displayed on the TV. 100

Trigger Output

Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 100

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized. 100

Target Source Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input switching. 100

Manual Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually. 100

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 100

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 101

Menu Item Function Page

En 91

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations

are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers or bi-amp connection.

Settings

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm or

larger or “small” if it is smaller than 16 cm.

❑ Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

❑ Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

❑ Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and its size.

Settings

Basic (default)

Select this when you use a normal speaker system (not to use Zone2

speakers or bi-amp connection).

7ch+1ZONE

Select this when you use Zone2 speakers (p.69) in addition to the

speaker system in the main zone.

5ch BI-AMP

Select this when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp

connections (p.19).

Large

Select this for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

Large

Select this for large speaker.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this for small speaker.

The subwoofer will produce center channel low-frequency components

(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Large

Select this for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Small (default)

Select this for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce surround channel low-frequency

components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

En 92

❑ Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and its size.

Settings

❑ Front Presence

Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected.

Settings

❑ Subwoofer

Selects whether or not subwoofer is connected and its phase.

Settings

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

❑ Extra Bass

Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None” or “Front” is set to “Small”.

❑ Bass Cross Over

Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component produced from speakers of which the

size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be

produced from the subwoofer or front speakers

Settings

40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (default), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

• If the volume and cross-over frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and cross-

over frequency to maximum.

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front

Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30m ~ 24.00m (1.0ft ~ 80.0ft) *0.05m (0.2ft) steps

Default

3.00m (10.0ft)

Large x1

Select this when 1 large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel

frequency components.

Large x2

Select this when 2 large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel

frequency components.

Small x1

Select this when 1 small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer will produce surround back channel low-frequency

components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

Small x2

(default)

Select this when 2 small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer will produce surround back channel low-frequency

components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce

surround back channel audio.

Use (default) Select this when presence speakers are connected.

None Select this when no presence speakers are connected.

Use

Normal

(default)

Select this when a subwoofer is connected (not to reverse the phase).

The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this when a subwoofer is connected (reverse the phase). The

subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will

produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency

components from other channels.

Off (default)

Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or

front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel low-

frequency components.

En 93

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front

Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0dB ~ +10.0dB (0.5dB steps)

Default

0.0dB

■ Parametric EQ

Adjusts sound quality of tone with an equalizer.

❑ PEQ Select

Selects a type of equalizer to be used.

Settings

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front” and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.36).

❑ PEQ Data Copy

Copies the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.36) to the

“Manual” fields for fine adjustment.

Choices

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Band / Gain:

You can select a center frequency from the preset 7 bands and adjust the gain.

Freq. / Gain: You can adjust the center frequency of the selected band and adjust the gain.

Q / Gain: You can adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and adjust the gain.

Clear: Restores the default settings for the selected speaker.

Use the cursor keys to adjust parameters and press ENTER.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0dB ~ +6.0dB (0.5dB steps)

Center frequency: 31.3Hz ~ 16.0kHz

Q factor: 0.500 ~ 10.08

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

Enables/disabled the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Manual

Select this when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the characteristics same as the

front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

Flat > Manual Copies the “Flat” values acquired with “Auto Setup”.

Front > Manual Copies the “Front” values acquired with “Auto Setup”.

Natural > Manual Copies the “Natural” values acquired with “Auto Setup”.

Off (default) Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance,

equalizer, etc.

En 94

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

❑ Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that

supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to this unit via HDMI. If necessary,

you can fine-adjust the audio output timing. “Offset” shows the difference between

automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.

Setting range

0ms ~ 250ms (1ms steps)

Default

0ms

❑ Manual

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.

Setting range

0ms ~ 250ms (1ms steps)

Default

0ms

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume so that sound is not too loud.

Setting range

-30.0dB ~ +15.0dB (5.0dB steps), +16.5dB

Default

+16.5dB

■ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level in conjunction with

volume adjustments.

Settings

Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range to make clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Off (default) Sets at the level when this unit last entered standby mode.

Sets at Mute, or -80.0dB ~ +16.5dB (0.5dB steps). (This setting works

only when “Max Volume” is set higher.)

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically.

En 95

Video

Configures the video output settings.

■ Analog to Analog Conversion

Enables/disables the video conversion (p.122) between the analog video jacks

(COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO).

Settings

• This unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

• 480p/576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals cannot be output from the VIDEO jacks (p.122).

■ Processing

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

Settings

• 720p-, 1080i- and 1080p-resolution video signals cannot be converted (p.122).

❑ Resolution

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Processing” is set to “On”.

Settings

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.104) in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that output videos may not be displayed on your

TV normally.)

❑ Aspect

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Processing” is set to “On”.

Settings

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i or 1080p

signals.

Off Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.

On (default)

Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.

Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks only.

Off (default) Disables the video signal processing.

Enables the video signal processing.

Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto (default)

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV

resolution.

480p/576p, 720p, 1080i,

1080p

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either

side of the screen.

En 96

HDMI

Configures the settings related to HDMI.

■ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.123).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.123) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

❑ TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of this unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The input source of this unit automatically switches to TV audio

(input jack selected in here) when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AV1~6, AUDIO1~2

Default

AV4

• When using ARC to input TV audio to this unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected in here for

connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

❑ ARC

Enables/disables ARC (p.21) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected

to this unit because TV audio signals input to this unit via ARC are not supported by this unit, set “ARC” to

“Off” and use the TV speaker.

❑ Standby Sync

Select whether to set this unit to standby in conjunction with TV power-off when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and

“Standby Sync”.

Off Disables ARC.

On (default) Enables ARC.

Off

Does not set this unit to standby mode in conjunction with TV

power-off.

Sets this unit to standby mode in conjunction with TV power-

off.

Auto (default)

Sets this unit to standby mode in conjunction with TV power-off

only when this unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

En 97

■ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

❑ Amp

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to this unit.

Settings

❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or

HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Settings

■ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when this

unit is in standby mode.

Settings

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (IP address, etc).

❑ DHCP

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

❑ Manual Setup

Configures the network parameters of this unit manually when “DHCP” is set to “Off”.

Submenu

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.

On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers.

Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(This unit consumes approximately 3 W of power.)

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually.

On (default)

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the network parameters (IP

address, etc.) of this unit.

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

En 98

■ Network Standby

Selects whether to turn on this unit by the command from other network devices

(network standby).

Settings

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to this unit from other network devices.

❑ Mode

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

❑ Address Setup

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted

access to this unit when “Mode” is set to “On”.

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Zone2 Set

Configures the audio output settings for Zone2.

• The “Zone2 Set” settings are available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) is set to “7ch+1ZONE”

❑ Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 maximum volume so that sound is not too loud.

Setting range

-30.0dB ~ +15.0dB (5.0dB steps), +16.5dB

Default

+16.5dB

❑ Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when this unit is turned on.

Settings

Off (default) Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(This unit consumes approximately 5 W of power.)

Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “Address Setup”, specify the MAC

addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to this

unit.

Off (default) Sets at the level when this unit last entered standby mode.

Sets at Mute, or -80.0dB ~ +16.5dB (0.5dB steps).

(This setting works only when “Max Volume” is set higher.)

En 99

■ Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.72).

Choice

Target: Zone 2

Settings

■ Zone Rename

Changes the zone names displayed on the TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys to select a zone to be renamed and press ENTER.

Press ENTER, use the cursor keys to rename, and then press ENTER again.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Function

Configures the functions that make this unit easier to use.

■ Auto Power Down

Sets the amount of time for auto-standby. If you do not operate this unit for the specified

time, this unit will automatically go into standby mode.

Settings

■ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

❑ Front Panel Display

Configures the front display settings.

Dimmer

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 ~ 0 (higher to brighten)

Default

Scroll

Sets the scrolling manner of the front display.

The display scrolls automatically if the text exceeds 14 characters.

Settings

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable (default)

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

Off Does not set this unit to standby mode automatically.

4 Hours, 8 Hours (default),

12 Hours

Sets this unit to standby mode when you have not operated this unit for the

specified time.

Continue (default) Sets the display to scroll continuously.

Once

Sets the display to scroll all characters once and then halt scrolling for

display of the first 14 characters.

En 100

❑ Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when this unit is operated

(input selection, volume adjustment, etc).

Settings

❑ Wall Paper

Selects a wall paper displayed on the TV.

Settings

■ Trigger Output

Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function synchronized with power status of each zone or

input switching.

❑ Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

❑ Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized.

Settings

❑ Target Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input switching

when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Choices

HDMI1~7, AV1~6, V-AUX, AUDIO1~2, TUNER, PHONO, (network sources), USB, DOCK

Settings

❑ Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of

the external component connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Picture1, Picture2, Picture3

Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there

is no video signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there

is no video signal.

Power (default)

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized with the power status of the zone

specified with “Target Zone.”

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized with the input switching in

the zone specified with “Target Zone.”

Electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Target

Source.”

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with

“Manual.”

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with input switching in Zone2.

All (default)

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with power status of the main zone or Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is

synchronized with input switching in the main zone or Zone2.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

High (default)

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.

Off (default) Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

En 101

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

You can view information about this unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

English (default) English

Japanese

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Français

Deutsch

Español

Viewing information about this unit

(Information menu)

En 102

Types of information

■ Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

• Even when this unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on

the specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

■ HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

Use the cursor keys ( / ) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

■ Network

Displays the network information on this unit.

■ System

Displays the system information on this unit.

• If this unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the firmware of this unit by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in

“Updating the firmware of this unit” (p.110).

■ Zone

Displays information about Zone2.

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal (front/

surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front

channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks (analog)

HDMI Error

Errors related to HDMI

HDCP Error: The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection).

Device Over: The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is

over the limit.

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address MAC address

Status Network connection status

Remote ID The remote control ID setting of the main unit (p.104)

TV Format The video signal type setting of this unit (p.104)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of this unit (p.103)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on this unit

Input The input source selected for Zone2

Volume The volume setting for Zone2

En 103

You can configure the system settings of this unit using the front display.

Set this unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the font panel, press MAIN ZONE .

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE to set this unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings become effective.

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)

Change the speaker impedance settings of unit depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

MAIN ZONE

PROGRAM STRAIGHT

Item Function Page

SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 103

REMOTE ID Selects the remote control ID of the main unit. 104

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 104

MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 104

INIT Restores the default settings. 104

UPDATE Updates the firmware. 105

VERSION

Checks the version of firmware currently installed on

this unit.

105

6 Ω MIN

Select this when you connect 6-ohm speakers to this unit. You can also

use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8 Ω MIN (default) Select this when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to this unit.

SPIMP.-8MIN

En 104

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)

Select the remote control ID of the main unit so that it matches to the ID of the remote

control (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each

remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1 (default), ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be

automatically canceled.

Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.

Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).

Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks 6 times, registration failed. Repeat from step 1.

• The registered remote control codes (p.106) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of this unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL (default)

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MON.CHK)

This unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jacks.

If you want to select a resolution in “Resolution” (p.95) regardless of the detection

results or if this unit does not detect it correctly, disable the monitor check function.

Settings

• In case this unit becomes inoperable because videos from this unit cannot be displayed on the TV after

“MON.CHK” is set to “SKIP”, reset the setting to “YES.

Restoring the default settings (INIT)

Restores the default settings for the selected item.

Choices

REMOTEID-ID1

YES (default)

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for this unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

TVFORMAT-PAL

MON.CHK-YES

INIT-CANCEL

En 105

Updating the firmware (UPDATE)

New firmware will be released irregularly for the purpose of additional features or

product improvements. It can be downloaded from our website. If this unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the

information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start

firmware update.

Choices

• If this unit detects a newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the firmware of this unit by following the

procedure in “Updating the firmware of this unit” (p.110).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on this unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.102) in the “Information” menu.

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

VOL.

SL SR

MUTE

SBL SB SBR

UPDATE-USB

VOL.

SL SR

MUTE

SBL SB SBR

VERSION-x.xx

En 106

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

ENTE

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

SOURCE/RECEIVER

CODE SET

By setting the code for external devices (BD/DVD players, etc.),

you can operate it with the remote control of this unit.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

• Make sure the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other

ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the registered

codes may be cleared. In this case, insert new batteries and setting the codes

again.

• When HDMI control of both this unit and playback device such as a BD/DVD

player are enabled, you may be able to control the device with the remote control

without registering the remote control code.

Setting the remote control code for a TV

By setting the remote control code for your TV, you can operate it

with the remote control of this unit.

• You can also register a remote control code of your TV to the input selection keys

(p.107). In this case, you can use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the

TV depending on its model. However, you need to press the corresponding input

selection key to play back TV audio on this unit.

• You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.108).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find a remote control code for your TV.

• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it

does not work then try the other codes.

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat

from step 2.

Press TV

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is set successfully,

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks 6 times, registration failed. Repeat from step 2.

■ TV operations

Once you have set the remote control code for your TV, you can

control it using the TV operation keys regardless of an input source

selected on this unit.

Controlling external devices with the remote control

TV operation keys

INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH Switch the channels of the TV

TV Turns on/off the TV.

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

En 107

Setting the remote control codes for

playback devices

By setting the remote control codes for your playback devices, you

can operate those devices with the remote control of this unit. Since

the codes are assigned to each input source key, you can select

the input source and device to control with the remote control

concurrently.

• At the factory, Yamaha CD player code (5095) is set for AV3. For the other input

selection keys, no codes are set.

• You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.108).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find a remote control code for your playback

device.

• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it

does not work then try the other codes.

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat

from step 2.

Press a corresponding input selection key.

For example, press HDMI1 to set the remote control code

for the playback device connected to the HDMI1 jack.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully,

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks 6 times, registration failed. Repeat from step 2.

• For details on how to register the input selection key applied the remote

control code on a corresponding SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene

assignments” (p.44).

■ Playback device operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your

playback device, you can control it using the following keys after

selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (this unit or

external device) to operate with the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric

keys. You can operate this unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange,

and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.

For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on

TUNER, you can operate FM/AM radio built in this unit when SOURCE/

RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when SOURCE/

RECEIVER lights up in green.

• These keys work only when the corresponding function is available on your

playback device and is possible to be operated with an infrared remote control.

SOURCE Turns on/off the playback device.

Menu operation

keys

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY Switches information on the display.

External device

operation keys

TOP MENU Displays the top menu.

POP-UP MENU Displays the pop-up menu.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected song/

video.

Search forward/backward (by holding

down).

Skip forward/backward.

Numeric keys Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys Control the TV (p.106).

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

INFO

MEMOR

PRESET

RTY

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

MAIN

PTI

REEN

TUNING

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SOURCE/RECEIVER

CODE SET

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

External device

operation keys

Menu operation keys

Input selection key

En 108

Programming from other remote controls

(learning)

The remote control of this unit can receive remote control signals

from other remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If

you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if

any key on the remote control does not work after you set the

remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function

to each key.

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat

from step 1.

Press one of the following keys depending on the

type of your device.

For playback device: press the input selection key

(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is

connected).

For TV: press TV .

Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”.

Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls

at each other.

Perform the following steps within 10 seconds.

a On this unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to

assign a function.

For playback device: SOURCE , menu operations keys,

external device operation keys

For TV: TV operation keys

b On the external device, press the key from which the operation

is learned.

Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE/

RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks 6 times, learning failed. Repeat step 5.

Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are

learned.

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks once.

SCENE

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-A UX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PAR TY

MOVIE MUSIC

DVD

RADIO

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

DOCK

AUDI O

OPTION

ON SCREEN

123 4

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

Remote control of external device

5 to 10 cm apart

Note

• If you press SOURCE/RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an

external receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys

or numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control this unit impossible.

If you need to restore the remote control code for this unit, perform the

following steps.

a Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.

b Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.

c Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INFO

MEMOR

PRESET

RTY

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

DISPLA

MAIN

OCK

AUDI

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

TUNING

SOURCE

SOURCE/RECEIVER

CODE SET

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

External device

operation keys

Menu operation keys

En 109

Resetting remote control codes

■ Resetting all remote control codes

You can clear all remote control codes (including functions learned

from other remote controls) and restore the default settings.

• The settings for controlling playback devices after selecting a scene (p.44) will be

also cleared.

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat

from step 1.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.

Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.

Once the remote control codes are reset successfully,

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks 6 times, resetting failed. Repeat from step 1.

■ Clearing functions learned from other

remote controls

❑ Clearing the assignment of each key

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat

from step 1.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV .

Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”.

Press the key that you want to reset.

Once the key assignment is cleared successfully,

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks 6 times, clearing failed. Repeat from step 2.

Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are

cleared.

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks once.

❑ Clearing the key assignments for each input source

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the

tip of a ballpoint pen.

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat

from step 1.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV .

Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.

Once the key assignment is cleared successfully,

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

If it blinks 6 times, clearing failed. Repeat from step 1.

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

ENTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

INPUT

MUTE

PTI

REEN

NIN

SOURCE/RECEIVER

CODE SET

Numeric keys

Input selection key

En 110

If this unit is connected to the Internet, the corresponding message

will be displayed on the TV when a newer firmware is available. In

this case, follow the procedure below to update the firmware of this

unit.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.105).

If the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed,

firmware update is available.

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”

appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE

on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in step 2. In this

case, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information”

and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in the

“System” screen (p.102). You can update the firmware of this unit by

pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

Updating the firmware of this unit

Note

• Do not operate this unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 15 minutes.

Information

icon

Message

System icon

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

123

V-AUX

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

PA RT Y

MOVIE MUSIC

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

MODE

ENT

HDMI OUT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

AUDIO

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

NET USBPHONO

TUNING

TUNER

RETURN

LUME

R. DE

TRAI

ENHAN

LEEP PURE DIRE

HDM

INF

MEM

PRE

VIE M

RADI

MUTE

HDMI

P-

DISPLA

MAIN

ZONE

EIVE

INPUT

MUTE

OCK

PTI

REEN

NET

USB

NIN

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 111

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the

speaker settings again (p.36). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use

“Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.91).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child, etc. accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote

control, the volume may suddenly increase. And this may cause injury or damage this

unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

maximum volume level for this unit in advance (p.94). You can also set the maximum

volume for Zone2 (p.98).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden large sound when

turning on this unit...

By default, the volume level when this unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” to set the volume to be

applied when this receiver is turned on (p.94). You can also set the initial volume for

Zone2 (p.98).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.123). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (TV, BD/DVD players, etc.) to this unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time when you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to

your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and

playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals of each device.

I want to turn off the onscreen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when this unit is operated

(input selection, volume adjustment, etc). In case that the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.100) in the

“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on this unit (speaker settings, etc.) by utilizing

“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.100).

The web control screen (p.74) becomes inaccessible...

If you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of this unit may change each time this

unit is turned on. Check the IP address of this unit in “Network” (p.102) in the

“Information” menu. Also, if you have enabled “MAC Address Filter” (p.98), you need to

specify the MAC address of your PC in “Address Setup” (p.98) to allow the PC to

access this unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to

the instruction manuals of it.

The supplied remote control concurrently controls this unit and

another Yamaha product that is not intended...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the supplied remote control may work on

another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on this unit. In this case,

set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver

(p.104).

Frequently asked questions

En 112

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the followings:

a The power cables of this unit, TV and playback devices (BD/DVD player, etc.) are connected to AC outlets securely.

b This unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (BD/DVD player, etc.) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are inserted to jacks on each devices securely.

Power and system

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated 3 times consecutively.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning and excessive static electricity) or by a

drop in power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize

and reboot this unit.

The power turns off (standby mode)

immediately.

This unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to this unit and

speakers (p.19).

The unit enters

standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

Since this unit was not operated for the specified time, auto-

standby worked.

To disable auto-standby, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to “Off”

(p.99).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.103).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to this unit and

speakers (p.19).

This unit is uncontrollable.

The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning and excessive static electricity) or by a

drop in power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize

and reboot this unit.

En 113

Audio

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys

Signals that this unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on this unit. To check the

audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu

(p.102).

The cable connecting this unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.94).

Any device connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned

on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of this unit

No sound is heard from a specific

speaker.

The playback source does not contain corresponding channel

signals.

To check it, select “7ch Stereo” (p.45).

The sound program/decoder currently selected does not use the

corresponding speaker.

To check it, select “7ch Stereo” (p.45).

Audio output of the corresponding speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change

the speaker setting (p.91).

The volume of the corresponding speaker is too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.93).

The speaker cable connecting this unit and corresponding

speaker is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The corresponding speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replacing with another speaker. If the problem persists, this unit may

be malfunctioning.

No sound is heard from the surround

back speaker.

The extended surround is disabled.

Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used

(p.79).

No sound is heard from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, to output the front

channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.92).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”

(p.92).

The subwoofer is turned off by the auto-standby function on it. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound from the playback device

(connected to this unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

To check it, use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.102).

This unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.97).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

En 114

Video

No sound from the TV (when HDMI

Control is used).

(If the TV is connected to this unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.96).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on this unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.96). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

Only the front speakers work on multi-

channel audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (PCM, etc.)

only.

Change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency device. Move this unit further away from such device.

The cable connecting this unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

Any device connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned

on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of this unit

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on this unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.

The video signal output from this unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.104).

The cable connecting this unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device

(connected to this unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by this unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video

Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.102). For information about video signals

supported by this unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.124).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

To check it, use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.102).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the

limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

Problem Cause Remedy

En 115

FM/AM radio

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.50).

Use an outdoor FM antenna commercially available. We recommend using a

sensitive multi-element antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna commercially available.

Radio stations cannot be selected

automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.50).

Use an outdoor antenna commercially available. We recommend using a

sensitive multi-element antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.50).

Use an outdoor AM antenna commercially available. Connect it to the ANTENNA

(AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered

as presets.

“Auto Preset” has been used.

“Auto Preset” is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations

manually (p.50).

Problem Cause Remedy

This unit does not detect the USB

device.

The USB cable connecting this unit and USB device is not

compliant with USB 2.0.

Use a USB cable compliant with USB 2.0.

Folders and files in the USB device

cannot be viewed.

The folder structure not supported by this unit is applied.

This unit supports folder hierarchies of up to 8 levels and up to 500 items (total of

files and subfolders) per folder. If necessary, modify the folder structure on your

USB device.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) is not obtained properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on this unit (p.97). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, make sure using an IP address which is not used by other network

devices in your network (p.97).

This unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select this unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.64).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of this unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

This unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and the settings of your router to connect them to

the same network.

En 116

Remote control

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or

played back.

The files are not supported by this unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both this unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by this unit, see “Playing back music

stored on PCs” (p.64).

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

It may not be available to listen because there might be a network problem, or the

station might be broadcasting in limited hour. Try the station later or select another

station.

The selected Internet radio station broadcasts audio silence

currently.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast audio silence during particular periods of

time in a day. Try the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (router, etc).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number is variable depending on radio station.

Problem Cause Remedy

This unit cannot be controlled using the

remote control.

Out of the operating range. Use the remote control in the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

Direct sunlight or lighting is striking the remote control sensor of

this unit.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control this unit (the key

lights up in orange).

The remote control IDs of the main unit and remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the main unit or remote control (p.104).

External devices cannot be controlled

using the remote control.

The remote control is set to control this unit.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices

(the key lights up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.106). Even if the remote control code is

registered properly set, some products may not respond to the remote control.

The remote control does not learn new

functions.

The batteries of the remote control of this unit and/or the external

device are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.108).

The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not

compatible with this remote control.

Learning is impossible in this case.

Memory capacity is full.

Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the new

functions (p.109).

Problem Cause Remedy

En 117

Error indications on the front display

Message

(alphabetical order)

Cause Remedy

Access denied

Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing setting and select this unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.64).

Access error

This unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

This unit cannot access the iPod connected to the USB jack. Turn off the iPod and turn on it again.

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to this unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between this unit and your router (or hub) (p.31).

No device

This unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

This unit cannot detect the iPod connected to the USB jack. Turn off the iPod and turn on it again.

Not found

The Bluetooth component is not found.

(When pairing)

Turn on the Bluetooth component and set it in pairing mode.

(When establishing a wireless connection)

- Turn on the Bluetooth component.

- Place the Bluetooth component within 10 m of the Bluetooth receiver.

- Perform pairing again.

Unknown iPod

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by this unit (p.54).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reasons.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by this unit. For information about the

formats supported by this unit, see “Playing back music stored on PCs” (p.64). If this unit cannot play

back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.

USB Overloaded

Over current passes through the USB device. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

En 118

Use this diagram as guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly.

Ideal speaker layout

60°

80°80°

30 cm or more

0.5 to 1 m

Turn it slightly inward to

reduce wall reflections.

Turn it slightly inward to

reduce wall reflections.

Front speaker (L)

Front speaker (R)

Center speaker

Surround speaker (L)

Surround speaker (R)

Presence speaker (L)

Presence speaker (R)

Surround back speaker (L)

Surround back speaker (R)

Subwoofer

1.8 m1.8 m

0.5 to 1 m

En 119

Audio information

Audio and video synchronization (Lipsync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem, and the capability of

maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.

Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an

automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and

accurately without user interaction.

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a

loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each

amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler

job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way.

CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in

a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material,

number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard.

Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to

combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in

the listening room of your own home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D

feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and

intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing

harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss of high-

frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass, providing improved performance for the

overall sound system.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front

channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels.

With an additional channel especially for bass effects, referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total

of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate

moving sound effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic

range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the precise sound

orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your

enjoyment.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for highdefinition programming and BD (Blu-ray disc).

Selected as an optional audio standard for BD, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel

output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels

simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of

the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate

Dolby Digital.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new

technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround

left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes

available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel

sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-

channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left

and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects

(monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used

with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder

built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-

ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for BD (Blu-ray disc), this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit

identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps,

Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains

fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital,

allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-

compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate.

“24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-

channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.

Glossary

En 120

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater

system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your

home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2

surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES

decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.

DTS Express

This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as BD (Blu-ray disc). It uses optimized low bit rate signals

for network streaming. In the case of a BD, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the

commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media

including BD (Blu-ray disc). Selected as an optional audio standard for BD, this technology delivers sound that is

virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for BD, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-

bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that

incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media

including BD (Blu-ray disc). Selected as an optional audio standard for BD, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-

bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for BD, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96

kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/

amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio

systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using

DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and

oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to

the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio

CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive

DSD signals via the HDMI jack.

FLAC

This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compression formats in compression

rate but provides higher audio quality.

LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is

counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5-

channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.

MP3

One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which

achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be

capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music

CD.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used

among others for mobile telephones, portable audio players and other low-capacity devices requiring high sound

quality. In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used to distribute contents on the Internet, and

as such is supported by computers, media servers and many other devices.

Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using

any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for

sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog

signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.

Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling

frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of

quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the

dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the

higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number

of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones

have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on

headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any

surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal

two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting

audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with

it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the

ADPCM method.

WMA

An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method,

which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be

capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.

En 121

Video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr

signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is

independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is

subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a video picture: color,

brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements

combined.

Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the

HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to billions of

colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The

increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep

Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video

interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and audio/video monitors

(such as digital televisions), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital

audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with

bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/

video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information

on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/.”

S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as

the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack

eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images.

“x.v.Color”

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the

expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB

standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly

effective for still pictures and computer graphics.

En 122

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to this unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

(solid line) is always available. (dotted line) is

available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion”

(p.95) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default).

■ Video conversion table

• You can select a resolution and an aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing.

• This unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out

VIDEO

out

Resolution

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p

480i/

576i

HDMI in

480i/576i

480p/576p

720p

1080i

1080p

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

480i/576i

480p/576p

720p

1080i

S VIDEO in 480i/576i

VIDEO in 480i/576i

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

S VIDEO

Video device This unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

COMPONENT

VIDEO out

VIDEO in

S VIDEO

En 123

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to this unit with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit (power,

volume, etc.) in conjunction with TV remote control operations. You can also control

playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players, etc.) connected to this

unit with an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.21) and “Connecting video

devices (BD/DVD players, etc.)” (p.26).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

- Standby synchronization

- Volume control including mute

- Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

- Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

- Switching between audio output devices (this unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from this unit’s remote control

- Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV in conjunction with a

scene selection (p.44)

- Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

- Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering

remote control codes (p.106)

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

• This setup is required every time when you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

• To use HDMI Control, connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

Turn on this unit, TV and playback devices.

Enable HDMI Control on this unit, TV and playback devices (HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD players, etc).

To enable HDMI Control on this unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.96) in the “Setup”

menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and

“Standby Sync”).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off this unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the main power of the TV and then turn on this unit and

playback devices.

Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.

Check the followings.

On this unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If

not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in step 2 and re-plugging the TV in step 3. It

may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices is over the

limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV's power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

This unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

HDMI Control

Press SCENE

(BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays video

from the playback device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

En 124

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

- 480i/60 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the

instruction manual of each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual of the playback device.

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents

downloaded via Internet) of BD or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio commentaries of the BD

or HD DVD content.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multi-channel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital

Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio,

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

En 125

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product.

Reference diagram (rear panel)

AC IN

+12V

0.1A MAX.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

TRIGGER OUT

DOCK NETWORK

PHONO

GND

S VIDEO

FMAM

75Ω

ANTENNA

AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3

(

)(

)

VIDEO

AV 2AV 1

COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI 1

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7

MONITOR OUT

OUT

REMOTE

SINGLE CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

SURROUND SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK

PRE OUT

SPEAKERS

FRONT CENTER SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

RL R R RLLL

SINGLE

RS-232C

En 126

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:

5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other

U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD

Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.

iPod™, iPhone™

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to

iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please

note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

Bluetooth™

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license

agreement.

“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

DLNA Certified is a trademark of the Digital Living Network Alliance in the United States and other countries.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and Windows Media Player

are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Trademarks

En 127

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Audio x 5 (AV5~6, AUDIO1~2, V-AUX)

[Other models]

Audio x 6 (AV5~6, AUDIO1~2, PHONO, V-AUX)

• Digital Audio (Support fs: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4)

Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV3~6, V-AUX)

S-Video x 1 (AV5) [U.K. and Europe models]

Component x 2 (AV1~2)

• HDMI Input

HDMI (Front Panel) x 1 (V-AUX)

HDMI (Rear Panel) x 7 (HDMI1~7)

•Other

DOCK x 1 (Audio, Composite Video)

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

Speaker out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*

, EXTRA SP L/R*

)

*1 Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP

(FRONT L/R)]

*2 Note: assignment is possible. [ZONE2, PRESENCE]

Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1~2, mono)

AV OUT x 1

AUDIO OUT x 1

ZONE2 OUT x 1

•Video

MONITOR OUT

- Component x 1

- Composite x 1

AV OUT

- Composite x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT1~2)

Remote jacks

• REMOTE IN x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 1

• TRIGGER OUT x 1

HDMI

• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync,

HDMI Control (CEC), ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

- VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

- Dolby Digital

- DTS

- DSD 6ch

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby TrueHD

- DTS-HD

- PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[U.K. and Europe models]

FM/AM with RDS x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

• Satellite Radio Ready [U.S.A. model]

SIRIUS Radio x 1 (SIRIUS)

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory, MTP

(Media Transfer Protocol)

• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with Windows 7, DLNA ver. 1.5

• Internet Radio

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution,

DTS Express

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Specifications

En 128

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8Ω)

Front L/R .............................................................100 W+100 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8Ω)

Front L/R .......................................... 130 W/ch (110 W+110 W)

Center...........................................................130 W/ch (110 W)

Surround L/R.................................... 130 W/ch (110 W+110 W)

Surround Back L/R .......................... 130 W/ch (110 W+110 W)

• Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8

)

[China, Asia and General models]

Front L/R .................................................................... 160 W/ch

Center ........................................................................ 160 W/ch

Surround L/R.............................................................. 160 W/ch

Surround Back L/R .................................................... 160 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω).................................. 140/180/210/250 W

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ............................. 100 or more

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)...............................200 mV/47 kΩ

[Other models]

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ

AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)...............................200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Signal

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................ 2.3 V

[Other models]

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD)............................................ 60 mV

AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................ 2.3 V

• Output Level / Output Impedance

REC OUT ...........................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front: Small) .................1 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance

AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..............................100 mV/560 Ω

• Frequency Response

AV5 etc. to Front (10 kHz to 100 kHz) .........................+0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

[China, Korea, Australia, U.K. and Europe, Asia and General

models]

PHONO ......................................................................0±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

AV5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)

(20 to 20 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω)..................................... 0.06% or less

[Other models]

PHONO to REC OUT (20 to 20 kHz, 1 V) ............ 0.02% or less

AV5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)

(20 to 20 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω)..................................... 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

AV5 etc.

(Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV, SP OUT

) .....100 dB or more

[Other models]

PHONO (Input Shorted 5 mV, REC OUT)...........81 dB or more

AV5 etc.

(Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV, SP OUT)

.....100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R (SP OUT)............................................. 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

AV5 etc.

(Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ..... 60 dB/45 dB or more

[Other models]

PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)... 60 dB/55 dB or more

AV5 etc.

(Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ..... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control

Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB

Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB

• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)

Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz

Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut.......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz

Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back).......12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.

Video Section

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC

[Other models]....................................................................PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)..................... NTSC/PAL

• Video Signal Level

Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-Video [U.K. and Europe models]

Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

C...................................................................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component

Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)

Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB

En 129

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]

.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono................................................................................ 71 dB

Stereo .............................................................................. 69 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono................................................................................. 0.3%

Stereo ............................................................................... 0.5%

• Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model].................... AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model]................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model] ....................................... AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 400 W/500 VA

[Asia and General models]............................................. 300 W

[Other models]................................................................ 330 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off / Standby Through Off..............0.1 W or less

HDMI Control On/Standby Through On (Typical) ............ 2.0 W

Network Standby On (Typical) .........................................2.0 W

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models] .............................................590 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ........................... 435 x 171 x 369 mm

(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-1/2”)

• Weight ...........................................................11.1 kg (24.5 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

YD455C0/OMEN3

Transcripción de documentos

AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Be sure to read “Safety Brochure” (supplied booklet) before using this unit. English for Europe En 1 CONTENTS 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 FEATURES What you can do with this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . 36 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 SETUP PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Selecting the input source and favorite settings at once (SCENE) . . 44 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Connecting video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Connecting audio devices (CD players, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 6 Connecting to the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Connecting an external power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Connecting video/audio recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Registering favorite radio stations (preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Playing back iPod music/videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Playback of iPod contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Connecting a device compatible with SCENE link playback (remote connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Connecting a Bluetooth receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Pairing Bluetooth components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Establishing a wireless connection and playing back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 En 2 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Viewing information about this unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . 101 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . 103 Playing back music stored on PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Preparing for Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Setting the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Controlling this unit from the web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Setting the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Configuring settings in accordance with a playback source (Option menu) . . . 77 Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Updating the firmware of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 CONFIGURATIONS APPENDIX Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) . . . 85 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 En 3 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with this product. ■ Remote control • Aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. ■ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x 2) Within 6 m 30° 30° Insert into the remote control in the correct polarity (+/-) ■ YPAO microphone ■ Power cable *The figure of the supplied power cable differs depending on regions. ■ AM antenna ■ FM antenna *The figure of the supplied FM antenna differs depending on regions. ■ Easy Setup Guide ■ CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • This manual mainly explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” means both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless the explanation describes exceptions. ■ Safety Brochure • “ ” indicates the cautions concerning operations or setup of the unit. • “ ” indicates the explanations for better use. En 5 FEATURES What you can do with this unit Ready for any kind of contents Network iPod p.54 p.64 to p.67 USB p.59 p.61 Bluetooth Supports 2 to 7.1 (plus presence) channel speaker system. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. Automatically optimizing the speaker p.36 settings to suit your room (YPAO) Sound field reproductions like actual p.46 movie theaters and concert halls from stereo or multi-channel audio sources (CINEMA DSP) Enjoying compressed music with p.49 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) *Requires optional Bluetooth receiver for playback via Bluetooth Network contents USB device Audio via Bluetooth Speakers Audio HDMI Control iPod Audio HDMI Control Video Audio/Video BD/DVD player TV AV receiver (this unit) Operating external devices with the supplied remote control p.106 Remote control of this unit Selecting the input source and favorite settings at once (SCENE) p.44 TV remote control Operating the TV, AV receiver and BD/DVD player in combination (HDMI Control) p.123 En 6 Full of useful functions! ● Connecting various devices (p.26) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on this unit allow you to connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, audio devices such as CD players, game consoles and camcorders, and so on. ● Creating stereoscopic sound fields (p.48) At time like this Connection of presence speakers enables to create a natural stereoscopic sound field in your room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers are connected, this unit automatically creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) to produce 3D surround sound. The combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on this unit does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it match the output jack of your external device (p.28). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.94). Turntable I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select whether to output audio signals through this unit and the TV (p.97). CD player BD/DVD player I want to this unit to be turned off automatically when not in use... Use “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to set the amount of time for auto-standby (p.99). Game console TV ● Listening to FM/AM radio (p.50) Camcorder ● Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.21) When using a TV that supports ARC, you only need a single HDMI cable to connect the TV and this unit to output video to the TV, input audio from the TV, and transmit HDMI Control signals. HDMI Control TV audio Video from external device This unit is equipped with the built-in FM/AM tuner. You can register favorite radio stations as presets. ● Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.49) When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. ● Easy operation with a TV screen You can navigate the various contents (iPod, USB, network, etc.), view the information, or configure the settings using the on-screen menu. I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish and Russian (p.101). I want to update the firmware... Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the firmware of this unit (p.105). If this unit is connected to the Internet, the corresponding message will be displayed on the TV when a newer firmware is available (p.110). There are many other settings to customize this unit. For details, see the following pages. ●Input settings (p.80) ●Scene settings (p.83) ●Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.86) ●Various function settings (p.89) ●Information view (audio signal, video signal, etc.) (p.102) ●System settings (p.103) En 7 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B Opening the front panel door • To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door. NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-A810 MAIN ZONE PURE DIRECT ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL INFO MEMORY INPUT AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD/DVD PHONES SILENT CINEMA C FM PRESET D USB TONE CONTROL PROGRAM TV CD RADIO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT iPod/iPhone E F G H 1 MAIN ZONE Turns on/off (standby) this unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when this unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. - HDMI Control is enabled (p.123) - The standby through function is enabled (p.97) - The network standby function is enabled (p.98) - The iPod is being charged (p.81) - An iPod wireless system is connected (p.55) 3 ZONE2 Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.71). 4 ZONE CONTROL Switches the zones (main or Zone2) to operate with the front panel controllers (p.71). 5 INFO Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.76). 6 MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.50). Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.73). VIDEO L AUDIO R YPAO MIC HDMI IN I J K L 7 PRESET Selects a preset FM/AM radio station (p.51). Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.73). 8 FM/AM Switches between FM and AM (p.50). 9 Front display Displays information (p.9). 0 TUNING Selects an FM/AM radio frequency (p.50). A Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). B PURE DIRECT Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.49). C INPUT Selects an input source. D SCENE Selects the registered input source and sound program, and HDMI output at once. Additionally, you can turn on this unit when it is in standby mode (p.44). E PHONES jack For connecting headphones. F USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.61) or an iPod via USB (p.54). G TONE CONTROL Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds output from speakers and headphones (p.78). H PROGRAM Selects a sound program or a surround decoder (p.45). I STRAIGHT Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.48). J VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting camcorders, game consoles, etc (p.29). K YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36). L VOLUME Adjusts the volume. En 8 Front display (indicators) OUT1/OUT2 Indicate the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. 2 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.46) is working. CINEMA DSP 3 Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) is working. 3 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49) is working. 4 ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.78) is working. 5 STEREO 5 6 7 89 SLEEP ZONE 2 0 VOL. MUTE SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR A Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. 4 ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC STEREO PARTY 3 TUNED OUT 1 2 1 HDMI 3 2 1 B 6 PARTY Lights up when this unit is in the party mode. 7 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 8 ZONE 2 Lights up when the audio output to Zone2 is enabled. 9 MUTE Flashes when audio is muted. 0 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. A Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. B Information display Displays the current status (input name, sound mode name, etc). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.76). A C C Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. Front speaker (L) Front speaker (R) Center speaker Surround speaker (L) Surround speaker (R) Surround back speaker (L) Surround back speaker (R) Surround back speaker Presence speaker (L) Presence speaker (R) Subwoofer Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when this unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. En 9 Rear panel 1 23 45 7 6 8 RS-232C DOCK NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO AM HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7 SPEAKERS ANTENNA L HDMI 2 (BD/DVD) ARC R COMPONENT VIDEO FM FRONT L R SURROUND L CENTER R SURROUND BACK/ BI–AMP L R ZONE 2/PRESENCE L REMOTE PR IN PR R SINGLE S VIDEO GND OUT 75Ω PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT EXTRA SP SINGLE L CENTER AC IN L R R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL 9 1 DOCK jack For connecting an optional Yamaha products such as iPod dock (p.55), iPod wireless system (p.55), and Bluetooth receiver (p.59). 2 PHONO jacks For connecting a turntable (p.29). 3 NETWORK jack For connecting to the network (p.31). 4 ANTENNA jacks For connecting FM and AM antennas (p.30). 5 HDMI OUT 1~2 jacks For connecting HDMI-compatible TVs to output video/audio signals (p.21). When using ARC, TV audio signal is input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. 6 HDMI1~7 jacks For connecting HDMI-compatible playback devices to input video/audio signals (p.26). 7 RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details. AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 0 A BC D AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2 PRE OUT EF G H 8 SPEAKERS terminals For connecting speakers (p.17). 9 AV1~6 jacks For connecting video/audio playback devices to input video/ audio signals (p.26). 0 AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (VCR, etc.) when an analog input (V-AUX, AV3~6 or AUDIO1~2) is selected (p.32). A AUDIO1~2 jacks For connecting audio playback devices to input audio signals (p.29). B MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jack: For connecting a TV compatible with component video to output video signals (p.25). VIDEO jack: For connecting a TV compatible with composite video to output video signals (p.25). C REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting a Yamaha product compatible with SCENE link playback (p.33), or connecting an infrared signal receiver/emitter to operate devices including this unit from another room (p.70). D TRIGGER OUT jack For connecting a device that supports the trigger function (p.33). E AUDIO OUT jacks For outputting audio to a recording device (tape deck, etc.) when an analog input (V-AUX, AV5~6 or AUDIO1~2) is selected (p.32). F ZONE2 OUT jacks For connecting external amplifier used in Zone2 to output audio (p.70). G PRE OUT jacks For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power amplifier (p.32). H AC IN For connecting the supplied power cable (p.34). En 10 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter Transmits infrared signals. 1 2 2 MAIN/ZONE2 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER 3 HDMI 1 4 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 V-AUX 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK PHONO NET USB 5 FM AM 6 PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY 7 MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY 0 A SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT C H SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO I OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN J DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU B G AV TUNER 8 9 E F MUTE MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 K L M 4 TV VOL Turns on/off an external device. 4 Input selection keys Select an input source to play back. HDMI1~7 HDMI1~7 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) AV1~6 AV1~6 jacks AUDIO AUDIO1~2 jacks (press repeatedly to switch between “AUDIO1” and “AUDIO2”) DOCK DOCK jack TUNER FM/AM radio PHONO PHONO jacks NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) USB USB jack (on the front panel) 5 Radio keys Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. FM Switches to FM radio. AM Switches to AM radio. MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets. PRESET Selects a preset station. TUNING Selects the radio frequency. 6 INFO Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.76). 7 SLEEP Switches this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). Turns on/off the party mode (p.72). 9 SCENE INPUT MUTE 3 SOURCE 8 PARTY 8 ENT TV D Switches the zones (main or Zone2) to operate with the remote control (p.71). TV CH HDMI OUT N Selects the assigned input source and sound program, and HDMI output at once. Additionally, you can turn on this unit when it is in standby mode (p.44). A Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Select a menu or a parameter. Confirms a selected item. Returns to the previous screen. B MODE Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio reception. Switches the iPod operation modes (p.57). C Numeric keys Enter numerical values such as radio frequencies. D TV operation keys Operate TV input, TV volume, etc (p.106). E CODE SET Registers remote control codes of external devices on the remote control (p.106). F SOURCE/RECEIVER Switches the devices (this unit or external device) to operate with the remote control (p.107). You can operate this unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external device when this key lights up in green. G RECEIVER Turns on/off (standby) this unit. H Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.45). I OPTION Displays the option menu (p.77). J VOLUME Adjusts the volume. K DISPLAY Display the status information on the TV (p.76). L MUTE Mutes the audio output. M External device operation keys Operate playback and menu display etc. for external devices (p.107). N HDMI OUT Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.43). 0 ON SCREEN Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. • To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote control code for each device in advance (p.106). En 11 SETUP General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.13) Select the speaker layout depending on the number of speakers and place the speakers in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.17) Connect the speakers to this unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.21) Connect a TV to this unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.26) Connect video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) and audio devices (CD players, etc.) to this unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.30) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to this unit. 6 Connecting to the network (p.31) Connect this unit to the network. 7 Connecting other devices (p.32) Connect external devices such as an external power amplifier and recording devices. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.34) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.35) Select a desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.36) Optimize the speaker settings such as volume balance and acoustic parameters to suit your room (YPAO). Now all the preparations are complete. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio, etc. with this unit! En 12 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout depending on the number of speakers and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • This unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers at the factory. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance of this unit to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.16). Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Abbr. Function 7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Front (L) Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds). Front (R) Center Produces center channel sounds (dialogs, vocals, etc). Surround (L) Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Surround (R) Surround back (L) Produce surround back right/left channel sounds. Surround back (R) Surround back Presence (L) Presence (R) Subwoofer ● Produces mixed-down surround back right/left channel sounds. Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48), the presence speakers create a natural stereoscopic sound field in your room. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to this unit. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● • For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.118). • If you have 7 speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers. To reinforce the rear right/left sounds, use them as surround back speakers. To create a natural stereoscopic sound field, use them as presence speakers. • 2 subwoofers connected to this unit output same sounds. En 13 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7.1+2 channel system 7.1 channel system (using surround back speakers) • The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. This unit automatically switches the speakers to be used depending on a selected CINEMA DSP (p.46). 7.1 channel system (using presence speakers) 6.1 channel system En 14 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5.1 channel system 4.1 channel system 3.1 channel system 2.1 channel system En 15 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Setting the speaker impedance This unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers at the factory. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. connecting speakers, connect the supplied power cable to 1 Before this unit and then to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE . MAIN ZONE STRAIGHT 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.-8MIN 4 Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”. MAIN ZONE to set this unit to standby mode and remove the 5 Press power cable from the AC wall outlet. Now you are ready to connect the speakers. En 16 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. Here are connections of 7.1+2, 7.1 and 6.1 channel system as examples. If you select another system, connect speakers while referring to the connection of 6.1 channel system. 7.1+2 channel system This unit (rear) 7.1 channel system (using surround back speakers) This unit (rear) Caution • Remove the power cable of this unit from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES” will appear on the front display when this unit is turned on. Cables necessary for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – + – Audio pin cable (2 for connecting 2 subwoofers) En 17 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7.1 channel system (using presence speakers) This unit (rear) 6.1 channel system This unit (rear) When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). En 18 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting speaker cables Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive. a Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable together firmly. b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. d Tighten the terminal. + (red) Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. When not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. • When using bi-amp connections, surround back speakers cannot be used. This unit (rear) c b FR ON T d a – (black) ■ Connecting the subwoofer Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. Audio pin cable En 19 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks HDMI jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. HDMI cable Digital Optical cable Component video cable • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. COAXIAL jacks • To connect a device that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is required. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable • The HDMI jacks of this unit support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D video transmission (through output) features. S VIDEO jack Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video cable. S-video cable AUDIO jacks Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable. Stereo pin cable VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. Video pin cable En 20 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to this unit so that videos input to this unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on this unit. The connection method varies depending on functions and video input jacks available on your TV. Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method. Does your TV support Audio Return Channel (ARC)? Yes ■ Connection method 1 (p.21) No Does your TV support HDMI Control? ■ Connection method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV) Connect the TV to this unit with an HDMI cable. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.96) in the “Setup” menu. • HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 1 jack This unit (rear) Yes HDMI OUT 2 1 HDMI input (ARC-compatible) ARC ■ Connection method 2 (p.23) HDMI DOCK NETWORK HDMI OUT 2 1 No PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA L AM HDMI ( ARC COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI FM PR PR R Does your TV have an HDMI input jack? Yes GND S VIDEO 75Ω PB ■ Connection method 3 (p.24) PB VIDEO VID Y Y MONITOR OU L R No OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 TV ■ Connection method 4 (p.25) About HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to this unit with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit (power, volume, etc.) in conjunction with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.123). • If you make an HDMI connection between your TV and this unit, any videos input to this unit can be output to the TV no matter how you connect video devices to this unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.25). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. So if you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to this unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to this unit. En 21 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Necessary settings To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings. For details on settings and operations of your TV, refer to the instruction manual of the TV. connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and 1 After power cable of this unit, turn on this unit, TV and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of this unit. a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV. b Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit. c Press ON SCREEN. VOLUME ENTER RETURN RN TOP DISPLAY D DIS A a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/ DVD player, etc). b Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off this unit and playback devices. c Turn on the main power of the TV and then turn on this unit and playback devices. d Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit. e Check the followings. On this unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. OPTION ON SCREEN 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER POP UP d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. f Check that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. Now the necessary settings are complete. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of this unit will be automatically switched to “AV4” and the TV audio will be played back on this unit. If TV audio cannot be heard, check that “ARC” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and re-plugging) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If any audio interruption happens while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to this unit (p.23). e Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI”. • “AV4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV4 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). f Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. g Use the cursor keys to select “On”. h Press ON SCREEN. En 22 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV) Necessary settings Connect the TV to this unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings. For details on settings and operations of your TV, refer to the instruction manual of the TV. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.96) in the “Setup” menu. connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and 1 After power cable of this unit, turn on this unit, TV and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of this unit. • HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 1 jack This unit (rear) a Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit. HDMI OUT 2 1 b Press ON SCREEN. ARC HDMI DOCK HDMI input OPTION ON SCREEN NETWORK HDMI OUT 2 1 PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO AM VOLUME ENTER ANTENNA L HDMI ( ARC COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI FM RETURN RN PR DISPLAY D DIS A ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER PR R GND S VIDEO 75Ω PB PB VIDEO TOP VID Y Y L OPTICAL R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 POP UP c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. MONITOR OU OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 O AUDIO 2 (TV) AV 4 AV4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) • If you make an HDMI connection between your TV and this unit, any videos input to this unit can be output to the TV no matter how you connect video devices to this unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.25). d Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI”. e Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. En 23 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/ DVD player, etc). b Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off this unit and playback devices. c Turn on the main power of the TV and then turn on this unit and playback devices. ■ Connection method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks) Connect the TV to this unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. HDMI OUT 1 jack This unit (rear) HDMI OUT 2 1 ARC HDMI HDMI input d Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit. DOCK NETWORK e Check the followings. On this unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. HDMI OUT 2 1 PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA L AM COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR R GND S VIDEO 75Ω PB VIDEO f Check that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of this unit will be automatically switched to “AV4” and the TV audio will be played back on this unit. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and re-plugging) the devices. It may solve the problem. VID Y Y Now the necessary settings are complete. HDMI FM PB On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. HDMI ( ARC MONITOR OU L OPTICAL R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 O AUDIO 2 (TV) AV 4 AV4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) If switch the input source of this unit to “AV4” by pressing AV4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio will be played back on this unit. • If you make an HDMI connection between your TV and this unit, any videos input to this unit can be output to the TV no matter how you connect video devices to this unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122). • “AV4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.25). • If you have connected any external device to the AV4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV1~6 and AUDIO1~2 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). En 24 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks) VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following connections. If you select “AV4” as the input source by pressing AV4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio will be played back on this unit. This unit (rear) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack Video input (composite video) DOCK NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 VIDEO (BD/DVD ARC • If you connect your TV to this unit with a cable other than HDMI, videos input to this unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog Conversion” setting. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122). PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA L AM VIDEO V COMPONENT VIDEO V FM MONITOR OUT PR PR R GND S VIDEO 75Ω PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT L • If you have connected any external device to the AV4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV1~6 and AUDIO1~2 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.44), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 TV COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) ■ Connecting another TV or a projector MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks Video input (component video) COMPONENT VIDEO This unit (rear) COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR Y PR HDMI OUT 2 Y ARC COMPONENT VIDEO AM HDMI HDMI input PB DOCK Y NETWORK HDMI OUT 2 1 ANTENNA L PB HDMI 1 MONITOR (BD/DVD) OUT Y PHONO HDMI OUT 2 1 ARC NETWORK 1 HDMI OUT 2 jack This unit (rear) PR PB PB DOCK This unit has 2 HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to this unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TVs (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.43). COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI ARC FM REMO PR IN PR R GND PHONO S VIDEO PB PB VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 75Ω ANTENNA L AM HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO FM PR VIDEO PR R Y Y MONITOR OUT + 0.1 TRIGGER GND S VIDEO 75Ω PB PB VIDEO L VID Y OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 Y OPTICAL R OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 MONITOR OU L O AUDIO 2 Projector R (TV) AV 4 AV4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) (TV) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 TV (already connected) • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. En 25 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 Connecting playback devices This unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod, a Bluetooth component or a USB storage device, see the following pages. - Connecting an iPod (p.54) - Connecting a Bluetooth receiver (p.59) - Connecting a USB storage device (p.61) ■ Component video connection Connect a video device to this unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on this unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Input jacks on this unit Video Connecting video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to this unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Audio Digital optical AV1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Component video Video output (component video) AV1~2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks This unit (rear) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO • Videos input to this unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to this unit with a cable other than HDMI. DOCK NETWORK PR PR HDMI OUT 2 1 PR PR PB PB Y Y PB ARC PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO • If the combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on this unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.28). PB ANTENNA L AM Y FM PR R S VIDEO GND Y PB 75Ω VIDEO Y ■ HDMI connection L Connect a video device to this unit with an HDMI cable. HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7 (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 O HDMI 6 HDMI 7 (BD/DVD) COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL C C OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV COAXIAL OUT AV 2 AUDIO 1 Video device COAXIAL RS-232C HDMI 1 OPTICAL AV 1 HDMI1~7 jacks This unit (rear) O R HDMI output HDMI AV1(OPTICAL) jack or Audio output AV2(COAXIAL) jack (digital optical or digital coaxial) If you select the input source by pressing AV1~2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from this unit. SPEAKERS R COMPONENT VIDEO FRONT L R SURROUND L CENTER R SURROUND BACK/ BI–AMP L R ZO HDMI REMOTE IN PR SINGLE OUT PB Y HDMI VIDEO MONITOR OUT +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT SINGLE CENTER L R AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK PRE OUT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 Video device If you select the input source by pressing HDMI1~7, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from this unit. En 26 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ S-video connection ■ Composite video connection Connect a video device to this unit with an S-video cable and a stereo pin cable. Connect a video device to this unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on this unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Input jacks on this unit Video Audio S-video Analog stereo Output jacks on video device AV5 (S VIDEO + AUDIO) Input jacks on this unit Video Audio This unit (rear) Video output (S-video) AV5 (S VIDEO) jack DOCK Digital coaxial AV3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Composite video AV5 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Analog stereo NETWORK AV6 (VIDEO + AUDIO) S PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO S L PR S VIDEO S VIDEO R GND Video output (composite video) S VIDEO PB This unit (rear) VIDEO AUDIO Y L L L L R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV3~6(VIDEO) jack Video device DOCK R OPTICAL AV 5 NETWORK R AV 6 R 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO AV5 (AUDIO) jacks V HDMI OUT 2 ARC R V PHONO AV 5 VIDEO L Audio output (analog stereo) ANTENNA L AM FM PR R GND S VIDEO 75Ω PB Video device VIDEO Y If you select the input source by pressing AV5, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from this unit. L C R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 C COAXIAL OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT COAXIAL AUDIO 1 O O OPTICAL OPTICAL L • When video signals are input through the S VIDEO jack and VIDEO jack of the AV5 jack at the same time, priority is given to the signals input through the S VIDEO jack. • Analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog Conversion” setting. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.122). L L L R R R R Any of AV3(COAXIAL) jack, AV4(OPTICAL) jack, AV5~6(AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital optical, digital coaxial, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV3~6, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from this unit. En 27 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks If the combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on this unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. It enables you to connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Video HDMI Component video Input jacks on this unit Audio Video Audio Digital optical HDMI1~7 AV1 (OPTICAL) AV4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial HDMI1~7 AV2~3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo HDMI1~7 AV5~6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1~2 Analog stereo AV1~2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV5~6 (AUDIO) AUDIO1~2 connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and 1 After power cable of this unit, turn on this unit and TV. 2 Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit. 3 Press ON SCREEN. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. the cursor keys ( / ) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be 5 Use used) and press the cursor key ( ). Necessary setting For example, if you have connected a video device to AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and AV5 (AUDIO) jacks of this unit, change the combination setting as follows. Video output (component video) AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks 6 Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. 7 Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used). COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PB DOCK PR Y NETWORK HDMI OUT 2 1 Y PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO PB PB ARC Y ANTENNA L AM FM PR R GND S VIDEO 75Ω PB VIDEO 8 Press ON SCREEN. L Y L AUDIO L L R R R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AV 5 This unit (rear) L AUDIO 1 AV5 (AUDIO) jacks Video device Now the necessary setting is complete. R R Audio output (analog stereo) If you select “AV2” as the input source by pressing AV2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from this unit. En 28 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting audio devices (CD players, etc.) Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players and a turntable to this unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a game console and a camcorder to this unit. Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume of this unit. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on this unit Digital optical AV1 (OPTICAL) AV4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV2~3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV5~6 (AUDIO) AUDIO1~2 Turntable (PHONO) PHONO USB PHONES SILENT CINEMA iPod/iPhone TONE CONTROL PROGRAM VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT VIDEO V L L AUDIO R R YPAO MIC HDMI IN HDMI This unit (front) Audio output (PHONO) PHONO jacks PHONO L PHONO L This unit (rear) L L R R R R GND Turntable GND DOCK NETWORK Game console HDMI OUT 2 1 ARC PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA L AM O COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL PR R GND O FM PR OPTICAL S VIDEO 75Ω PB PB VIDEO Y Y C VI MONITOR OU L COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 COAXIAL L L L R OPTICAL C OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT Audio device L R AUDIO 1 Camcorder R AUDIO 2 R AV1~6 jacks AUDIO1~2 jacks R Audio output (any of digital optical, digital coaxial, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV1~6, AUDIO1~2 or PHONO, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from this unit. If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from this unit. • If you connect video devices to both the HDMI IN jack and VIDEO/AUDIO jacks, this unit outputs video/ audio input through the HDMI IN jack. En 29 1 2 3 4 5 FM/AM antenna connections 6 7 8 9 10 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to this unit. FM antenna AM antenna This unit (rear) RS-232C DOCK NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO AM HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7 SPEAKERS ANTENNA L HDMI 2 (BD/DVD) ARC R COMPONENT VIDEO FM FRONT L R SURROUND L CENTER R SURROUND BACK/ BI–AMP L R ZONE 2 REMOTE PR IN PR R GND SINGLE S VIDEO OUT 75Ω PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT EX SINGLE L CENTER L Assembling and connecting the AM antenna Hold down Insert Release • Unwind the antenna cable from the AM antenna unit only the length needed. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 Network connections 7 8 9 10 6 Connecting to the network Connect this unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on PCs and DLNA servers such as Network Attached Storage (NAS) on this unit. Internet Network Attached Storage (NAS) • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of your network devices (such as a router) may block the access of this unit to the network devices or the Internet. In such cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • You can connect this unit to up to 16 music servers (PC, etc.), and each server must be connected to the same subnet as this unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. WAN PC LAN Modem Router Network cable DOCK NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA L AM HDMI 2 (BD/DVD) ARC R COMPONENT VIDEO FM REMOTE PR IN PR R GND S VIDEO OUT 75Ω PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT L R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 This unit (rear) • When using a router that supports the DHCP function, the network parameters (IP address, etc.) will be automatically assigned to this unit without configuring the network settings of this unit. If your router does not support the DHCP function or you want to configure the network parameters manually, configure the network settings (p.97). • You can check whether the network parameters (IP address, etc.) are properly assigned to this unit in “Network” (p.102) in the “Information”. En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Other connections 8 9 10 Connecting video/audio recording devices 7 Connecting other devices You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. These jacks output analog video/audio signals selected as the input. Connecting an external power amplifier When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of this unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. • To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV5~6 jacks or V-AUX (VIDEO/ AUDIO) jacks of this unit. • To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV5~6 jacks, AUDIO1~2 jacks or VAUX (AUDIO) jacks of this unit. Video/audio input This unit (rear) This unit (rear) AV OUT jacks VIDEO RS-232C V HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 ORK HDMI 7 (BD/DVD) ARC HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 HDMI 2 R COMPONENT VIDEO FRONT L R SURROUND L CENTER R SURROUND BACK/ BI–AMP L R ZONE 2/PRESENCE L L ANTENNA FM AM IN FM S VIDEO MONITOR OUT +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT CENTER Y AC IN R VIDEO AV OUT EXTRA SP SINGLE Video recording device R R OUT 75Ω PB Y CEN PR GND VIDEO L L IN SINGLE OUT PB FRONT REMOTE PR 75Ω L R COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE S VIDEO HDMI L SPEAKERS ANTENNA HDMI 3 (BD/DVD) ARC AM V MONITOR OUT AUDIO +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT L L R R R AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2 PRE OUT OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 1 23 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 OUT 5 L L L R R 1 FRONT jacks R Output front channel sounds. 2 SURROUND jacks Output surround channel sounds. AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT jacks Audio recording device AUDIO Audio input 3 SUR. BACK jacks Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). 4 SUBWOOFER1~2 jacks For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them. 5 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Other connections 8 9 10 Connecting a device compatible with SCENE link playback (remote connection) Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function If you have a Yamaha product that has the capability of the SCENE control signal transmission, you can control the Yamaha product in conjunction with a scene selection (p.44) by connecting it to the REMOTE OUT jack with a monaural mini-jack cable. The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operations (power-on/off, input selection, etc.) on this unit. If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack. This unit (rear) REMOTE OUT jack This unit (rear) REMOTE IN ORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) ARC ORK ANTENNA AM R COMPONENT VIDEO FM FRONT L HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 CEN HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI (BD/DVD) ARC REMOTE IN ANTENNA PR GND S VIDEO OUT 75Ω PB Y AM Remote input VIDEO MONITOR OUT R COMPONENT VIDEO FM GND S VIDEO L CEN OUT 75Ω +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT PB VIDEO REMOTE IN L FRONT REMOTE IN PR Y R MONITOR OUT System connection input +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT L OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 OUT Yamaha product (DVD player, etc.) R OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO OUT AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 OUT +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT TRIGGER OUT jack • If you connect a Yamaha product compatible with SCENE link playback to the REMOTE OUT jack, you can start playback on the Yamaha product in conjunction with a scene selection (p.44). To enable the SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.84) in the “Scene” menu. Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection • You also connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to operate devices in the main zone from Zone2 (p.70). • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu. En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Power cable connection 9 10 8 Connecting the power cable After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to this unit and then to an AC wall outlet. This unit (rear) RS-232C MI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7 SPEAKERS T L R SURROUND L CENTER R SURROUND BACK/ BI–AMP L R ZONE 2/PRESENCE L SINGLE EXTRA SP SINGLE CENTER AC IN L R UDIO OUT ZONE 2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2 PRE OUT To an AC wall outlet En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Language setting 10 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB PRESET TUNING Select a desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish and Russian. AV FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO ON SCREEN 1 Press RECEIVER to turn on this unit. on the TV and switch the TV input to display 2 Turn the video from this unit. 3 Press ON SCREEN. the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press 4 Use ENTER. OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY A MUTE MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH the cursor keys ( / ) to select “Language” and 5 Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a desired language. HDMI OUT MUTE 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV AV SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE CD RADIO By using the Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function, this unit automatically detects speaker connections and distances from the listening position, and optimizes the speaker settings such as volume balance and acoustic parameters to suit your room. the YPAO microphone at ear height in your 4 Place listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. This unit (front) Please note the following when using YPAO. • Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to this unit. • During the measuring process, the test tones are output at high volume. Take care that the test tone does not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others. OPTION ON SCREEN • During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. • During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. VOLUME ENTER RETURN • Do not connect headphones. DISPLAY A • If your subwoofer supports the auto-standby function, disable it. POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH HDMI OUT 1 Press RECEIVER to turn on this unit. on the TV and switch the TV input to display 2 Turn the video from this unit. on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. 3 Turned If the cross-over frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX YPAO microphone Listening position Ear height CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN MAX Place the YPAO microphone at ear height in your listening position. We recommend using a tripod to adjust the height. You can use the tripod screws to fix the microphone in place. En 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup MAIN ZONE 2 The following screen appears on the TV. CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER • If you perform the single measure, you will be able to enjoy surround sound at that position with optimized speaker settings. If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. HDMI 1 2 3 4 7 V-AUX 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY AV Single measure Multi measure (5 listening positions) SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO desired, change the measuring method (multi/ 5 Ifsingle). OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY A 1 4 5 213 a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE Multi measure MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 Multi measure (1 listening position + 4 circumferences) (2 listening positions + front/back) 2 3 1 5 4 3 1 2 4 4 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE Settings Yes Select this if your listening position is variable or you will enjoy surround sound with your company. You can perform the measurement at up to 8 positions to optimize the speaker settings to suit all of those positions (multi measure). No (default) Select this if your listening position is fixed in one position. You will perform the measurement only once to optimize the speaker settings suit to the position (single measure). Now all preparations are complete. See the following page to start the measurement. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.39) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.38) En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup MAIN ZONE 2 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER save the measurement results, use the cursor 3 To keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. HDMI When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below to make the measurement. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB • YPAO measurement is not performed correctly when any obstacles are in the room. PRESET TUNING • During the measuring process (about 3 minutes), keep stuff in the corners or remove it from the room. AV FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT start the measurement, use the cursor keys to 1 To select “Measure” and press ENTER. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU MUTE MODE Now optimization of the speaker settings is complete. • To cancel the measurement, press RETURN. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 4 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from this unit. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A TOP MENU The corrected speaker settings are applied. RADIO Caution • Since the YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, do not place the microphone in any place where it will be subjected to direct sunlight or high temperatures (top of an AV equipment, etc). ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.41) or “Warning messages” (p.42). • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.40). the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and 2 Use press ENTER. En 38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup MAIN ZONE 2 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below to make the measurement. AV 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY the measurement at all listening position are 3 Ifmade, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. If you have made the measurement at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. • YPAO measurement is not performed correctly when any obstacles are in the room. • During the measuring process, keep stuff in the corners or remove it from the room. It takes about 10 minutes to make the measurement at 8 listening positions. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.41) or “Warning messages” (p.42). ENHANCER PURE DIRECT start the measurement, use the cursor keys to 1 To select “Measure” and press ENTER. SCENE CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. MUTE MODE • To cancel the measurement, press RETURN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. ENT • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.40). the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and 4 Use press ENTER. save the measurement result, use the cursor 5 To keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE the YPAO microphone to the next listening 2 Move position and press ENTER. Repeat step 2 until the measurement at all listening positions (up to 8) are made. The corrected speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 6 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from this unit. Now optimization of the speaker settings is complete. En 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup MAIN ZONE 2 Size Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker Caution HDMI 1 Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 7 V-AUX 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING • Since the YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, do not place the microphone in any place where it will be subjected to direct sunlight or high temperatures (top of an AV equipment, etc). AV INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV Checking the measurement results You can check the YPAO measurement results. the measurement, use the cursor keys to 1 After select “Result” and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • A speaker with any problem is indicated with a red-boxed message. SCENE CD RADIO ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu. In this case, the previous measurement results are displayed. The following screen appears. Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments MUTE When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 1 2 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH finish checking the results and return to the 3 To previous screen, press RETURN. 3 HDMI OUT MUTE the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto 1 InSetup” and then “Result” (p.88). the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and 2 Use press ENTER. 1 Measurement result items 2 Measurement result details 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item Wiring Polarity of each speaker Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the correct polarity (+/-). Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reversed polarity (+/-). 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause Remedy E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2: No Sur. SP Either of surround speakers is not detected. E-3: No F.PRNS SP Either of presence speakers is not detected. E-4: SBRSBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off this unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, the measurement starts again on the condition this unit ignores the noisy error even if noises are detected. E-6: Check Sur. Any surround back speaker is connected while no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers should be connected when using surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off this unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on this unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off this unit, and then check the speaker connections. En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup Warning messages Even if any warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again to use this unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1: Out of Phase Any of the speaker cables may be connected with the reversed polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.40) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker indicated with “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off this unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. W-2: Over Distance Any of the speakers is placed more than 24 m from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.40) and move the speaker indicated with “>24.0m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m of the listening position. W-3: Level Error There are a significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the use environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with as similar specifications as possible. En 42 MAIN ZONE 2 PLAYBACK CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING AV INFO Basic playback procedure Input selection keys MEMORY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE CD RADIO ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN VOLUME DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MUTE Cursor keys ENTER MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 on external devices (TV, BD/DVD player, etc.) 1 Turn connected to this unit. the input selection keys to select an input 2 Use source. playback on the external device, or select a 3 Start radio station. 4 8 Refer to the instruction manual of the external device. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. - Listening to FM/AM radio (p.50) - Playing back iPod music/videos (p.54) - Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.59) - Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.61) - Playing back music stored on PCs (p.64) - Listening to Internet radio (p.67) 4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH HDMI OUT HDMI OUT Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output switches. VOL. HDMIOUT1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1 SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. HDMI OUT 2 Outputs the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.44). • When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, this unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution that both TVs connected to this unit support. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack, and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, this unit outputs 720p video signals.) • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust treble/bass parts of sound, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.78). On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired input source and press ENTER. En 43 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/RECEIVER Selecting the input source and favorite settings at once (SCENE) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack at once. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY 1 Press SCENE. The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. This unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU 2 3 6 7 9 0 10 8 HDMI1 MOVIE (Drama) Off HDMI OUT 1+2 TV AV4 STRAIGHT On HDMI OUT 1+2 CD AV3 STRAIGHT Off HDMI OUT 1+2 TUNER MUSIC (7ch Stereo) On HDMI OUT 1+2 ENT On-screen scene selection INPUT TV CH the following operations to prepare the 1 Perform settings you want to assign to a scene. - Select an input source (p.43) - Select a sound program (p.45) - Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49) - Select an HDMI output jack (p.43) down the desired SCENE key until “SET 2 Hold Complete” appears on the front display. HDMI output jack BD/DVD 4 TV TV VOL Compressed Music Enhancer Input RADIO 5 Sound program SCENE MUTE MODE 1 Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY A TOP MENU By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN SCENE Configuring scene assignments you want to control the corresponding playback 3 Ifdevice after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding SCENE key and input selection key together for more than 3 seconds. Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/ RECEIVER blinks twice. HDMI OUT MUTE a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER. • If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see “Setting the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.107) to register it. • You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.83). • You can start playback of external devices connected to this unit via HDMI or a Yamaha product connected to the REMOTE OUT jack, in conjunction with a scene selection (SCENE link playback). To enable the SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.84) in the “Scene” menu. En 44 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Selecting the sound mode SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB PRESET TUNING This unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with a favorite sound mode (sound field effect, stereo playback, etc). AV FM AM INFO MEMORY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE CD RADIO VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Press MOVIE repeatedly. Press MUSIC repeatedly. 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “Sound Program” menu (p.85). • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. Selecting a surround decoder (p.48) ENTER Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. • When you play back audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz or DTS Express sources, the straight decode mode (p.48) is automatically selected. Switching to the straight decode mode (p.48) • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound with the speaker indicators on the front panel (p.9) or the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.101). 4 8 ENT Switching to the Pure Direct mode (p.49) Press PURE DIRECT. TV INPUT TV VOL c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. Cursor keys Press STRAIGHT. 2 b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. MUTE MODE 1 a Press ON SCREEN. Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback (p.47) ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.46) On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49) Press ENHANCER. En 45 Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. This unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up ❑ ENTERTAINMENT VOL. Sci-Fi SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Sound program Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium. Action Game This program is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting games and FPS games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects and dialog from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more clear and spatial sound field. Music Video This program offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. • When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected. ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs and games. ❑ MOVIE THEATER Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive sounds. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. En 46 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources such as music CDs. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL Hall in Munich This program simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❑ LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. When multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilizes CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. En 47 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enjoying unprocessed playback CINEMA DSP 3D enables to create a natural stereoscopic sound field in your room. CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions are met. - One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected (p.46). - “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.78) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default). ■ Enjoying unprocessed sounds in original channels (straight decode) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV AV SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT “CINEMA DSP SCENE CD SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT 3” lights up RADIO VOL. OPTION ON SCREEN 3 VOLUME ENTER RETURN Hall in Vienna SW PL PR C R L SL SR SBL SBR DISPLAY A You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. When the straight decode mode is enabled, each speaker produces each channel audio signal directly (without sound field processing). When you play back 2-channel sources such as CD, stereo sound is heard from the front speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit produces unprocessed multichannel sounds. 1 Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. VOL. POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH HDMI OUT • We recommend using presence speakers to have a full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, this unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields even when no presence speakers are connected. ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, this unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side speakers. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR STRAIGHT ■ Enjoying unprocessed multi-channel sounds (surround decoder) The surround decoder enables unprocessed multi-channel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multi-channel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.119). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder switches. VOL. ProLogic Pro Logic PLIIx Movie PLII Movie SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for any sources. Uses the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. En 48 MAIN ZONE 2 PLIIx Music CODE SET PLII Music SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY PLIIx Game PLII Game AV MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Uses the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music. • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Uses the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) Compressed Music Enhancer improves the sound enhancer near to the original depth and width of compressed music sources. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. “ENHANCER” lights up ENHANCER VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MODE When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (front display, etc). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 1 Press PURE DIRECT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources. Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. ENT Enhancer On VOL. - Signals of which sampling rate is over 48kHz - High-definition streaming audio VOL. TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH HDMI OUT PUREDIRECT SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.79) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. - Selecting sound programs - Adjusting the tone control Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) - Operating the on-screen menu - Viewing information on the front display (when not operated) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects like a multi-channel speaker system with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. En 49 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Listening to FM/AM radio SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT TUNER FM AM MEMORY PRESET TUNING SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN Selecting a frequency for reception TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input 1 Press source. 2 Press FM or AM to select a band. VOL. DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU FM87.50MHz MUTE MODE MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE • If you cannot have a good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/ AM antennas. TV CH HDMI OUT Numeric keys ENT SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search the station automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). VOL. Registering favorite radio stations (preset) You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you registered stations, you can easily tune into those stations by selecting the preset number. • You can automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals using “Auto Preset” (p.53). ■ Registering a radio station Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.50) 1 Follow to tune into a desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. The radio station will be registered to the preset number “01” for the first time. After that, it will be registered to an empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number). VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz STEREO TUNED FM98.50MHz SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of receivable range SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Preset number • To select a preset number to which the station will be registered, press MEMORY once after tuning into a desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. VOL. STEREO TUNED 02:Empty SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR “Empty” (not in use) or frequency currently registered • You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception by pressing MODE. When signal reception for FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. En 50 MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Selecting a preset station CODE SET HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING AV TUNER PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV Radio Data System tuning Tune into a registered radio station by selecting the preset number. SOURCE RECEIVER SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT INFO TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input 1 Press source. PRESET repeatedly to select a desired radio 2 Press station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. PRESET VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR SCENE CD ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information into a desired Radio Data System broadcasting 1 Tune station. RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. VOLUME ENTER RETURN • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. DISPLAY A • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.53). 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the display item switches. MODE • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.53). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV VOL TV CH Numeric keys INFO HDMI OUT VOL. STEREO TUNED SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR ProgramType Item name ENT TV INPUT MUTE Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time” when tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information appears. 9850 VOL. STEREO TUNED CLASSICS SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Type of the current program Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency En 51 MAIN ZONE 2 Operating the radio on the TV CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time” do not appear when the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. HDMI 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY TUNER When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, this unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A MUTE ■ Receiving traffic information automatically “TUNER” is selected as the input source, 1 When press OPTION. the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” 2 Use (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys ( / ) while “READY” is displayed. • To cancel the search, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH HDMI OUT The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. FINISH VOL. STEREO TUNED TPFM101.30MHz SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input 1 Press source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. ■ Playback screen 1 2 3 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.51), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. 2 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 3 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Traffic information station (frequency) • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. En 52 MAIN ZONE 2 Menu CODE SET Submenu Function ■ Browse screen SOURCE RECEIVER FM Switches to FM/AM. HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK 1 AM Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Memory Registers the selected station as presets. Direct Enters a frequency directly. AV TUNER PHONO FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV NET USB PRESET TUNING Manual Tuning SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN Browse DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MODE Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 2 1 Preset station list Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number 3 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. 8 ENT Utility TV INPUT TV VOL Submenu TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 53 Playing back iPod music/videos You can play back iPod music/videos on this unit using a USB cable supplied with iPod, an optional Yamaha iPod dock (such as YDS-12) or an optional Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10). Connecting an iPod ■ Using a USB cable • This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” means both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless the explanation describes exceptions. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or software version of an iPod, or the model of an iPod dock. Connect your iPod to this unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. 1 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Functional differences depending on the way of connection USB cable supplied with iPod Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12) Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10) Audio output ✓ ✓ ✓ Video output ✓* ✓ — Operation with remote control of the unit ✓ ✓ — Operation with iPod ✓ ✓ ✓ Operation on TV screen ✓ ✓ — Charging ✓ ✓ ✓ Charging during standby mode — ✓ ✓ 2 Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. This unit (front) INPUT Supported iPod iPod touch iPod nano (2 gen. to 6 gen.) iPod classic iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone iPod touch iPod nano iPod classic iPod with video iPod with color display iPod with click wheel iPod mini iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone iPod touch iPod nano iPod classic iPod with video iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone BD/DVD PHONES SILENT CINEMA USB Connected USB TONE CONTROL PROGRAM iPod/iPhone VOL. SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR * Requires an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied). Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of this unit and set “Video Out (USB)” (p.82) in the “Input” menu to “V-AUX”. En 54 ■ Using an iPod dock Refer to the instruction manual of the iPod dock in addition. 1 DOCK DOCK When this unit is in standby mode, connect the iPod dock to the DOCK jack. NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO Locate the iPod dock at the distance as far as from this unit. ANTENNA L AM COMPONENT VIDEO FM REMOT PR IN PR R GND S VIDEO OUT 75Ω PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT +1 0.1A TRIGGER O L DOCK DOCK R NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC 12 A PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA L AM REMOT PR OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 This unit (rear) COMPONENT VIDEO FM IN PR R GND S VIDEO OUT 75Ω PB PB VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT +1 0.1A TRIGGER O L R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 iPod wireless system (receiver) VIDEO Y iPod dock 3 B AUDIO 2 This unit (rear) your iPod to the iPod dock and turn on this 2 Connect unit. • While an iPod is connected to the iPod dock, the iPod is charged. You can select whether to charge the iPod when this unit is in standby mode using “Standby Charge” (p.81) in the “Input” menu. ■ Using an iPod wireless system When using an iPod wireless system, operate your iPod itself to start playback after making a connection. Refer to the instruction manual of the iPod wireless system in addition. the power cable is removed from an AC wall 1 When outlet, connect the iPod wireless system (receiver) to the DOCK jack. Locate the iPod wireless system (receiver) at the distance as far as from this unit. 2 Connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. your iPod to the iPod wireless system 3 Connect (transmitter). 4 On your iPod, select the content and start playback. This unit automatically turns on and selects “DOCK” as the input source. • You can select whether to control this unit (power on/off, input selection and volume adjustment) in conjunction with iPod operations using “iPod Interlock” (p.82) in the “Input” menu. When the iPod interlock function is disabled, turn on this unit and select the input source manually. • While the iPod wireless system (transmitter) is placed on the iPod wireless system (receiver), the iPod is charged. You can select whether to charge the iPod when this unit is in standby mode using “Standby Charge” (p.81) in the “Input” menu. Caution • When you use iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to this unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, remove the iPod from the iPod wireless system (transmitter) immediately. To prevent this problem, we recommend using “Max Volume” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for this unit. En 55 MAIN ZONE 2 Playback of iPod contents CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER When using a USB cable or an iPod dock, you can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV. HDMI 1 2 3 4 7 V-AUX 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB PRESET TUNING ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 AV FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV DOCK USB ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE The browse screen is displayed on the TV. RADIO 5 using a USB cable: press USB to select 1 When “USB” as the input source. When using an iPod dock: press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT CD • When using an iPod wireless system, you cannot control the iPod from the TV screen. Operate your iPod itself to select the content and start playback. 4 1 Status indicators Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.58) and playback status (play/pause, etc). OPTION ON SCREEN 2 List name VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE Menu operation keys Cursor keys 3 Contents list Displays the list of iPod contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. ENTER RETURN 4 Item number/total MODE 5 Operation menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH HDMI OUT * Display example (when using an iPod dock) the cursor keys to select an item and press 2 Use ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves to 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod itself to select a content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.57). En 56 MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Playback screen CODE SET ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) SOURCE RECEIVER 1 2 HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING 1 Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. AV INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY 3 4 The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. your iPod itself or the remote control to 2 Operate start playback. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 1 Status indicators ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.58) and playback status (play/pause, etc). SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN 2 Playback information DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 4 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu TV CH Function Cursor keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms the selection. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. 3 Album image ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MODE Displays the artist name, album name, song title and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled. Operational remote control keys HDMI OUT Submenu Function External device operation keys Stops playback. Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (while holding down). Resumes playback from pause. MUTE Stops playback. Stops playback temporarily. Play Control Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. En 57 MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings CODE SET You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING • When using an iPod wireless system, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod. AV INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod, or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. “USB” or “DOCK” is selected as the input 1 When source, press OPTION. the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or 2 Use “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN OPTION POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A MUTE MODE MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. the cursor keys ( 3 Use press ENTER. / ) to select a setting and 4 8 Item ENT TV Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “ appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “ appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “ 1 ” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “ appears in the TV screen. INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH HDMI OUT Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) ” ” ” 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 58 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Playing back music via Bluetooth SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY DOCK You can play back music stored on a Bluetooth component on this unit using a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, optional). Refer to the instruction manuals of the Bluetooth receiver and your Bluetooth component in addition. This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile. MEMORY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN OPTION POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A • When connecting your Bluetooth component to the Bluetooth receiver for the first time, you need to perform “pairing” (mutual recognition for 2 Bluetooth components). After that, you only need to establish a wireless connection between those components to play back music via Bluetooth. “Pairing” must be performed between each combination. So if you have several Bluetooth components, you need to pair each of your Bluetooth components with the Bluetooth receiver. Connecting a Bluetooth receiver this unit is in standby mode, connect the 1 When Bluetooth receiver to the DOCK jack. Locate the Bluetooth receiver at the distance as far as from this unit. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH DOCK NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA L AM • The Yamaha Bluetooth receiver (YBA-10) can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When the ninth component is paired, the pairing setting for the component which has not been used for the longest period of time will be deleted. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. 1 Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source. on your Bluetooth component and set it to the 2 Turn pairing mode. OPTION, use the cursor keys to select 3 Press “Pairing” (Pairing), and then press ENTER. Searching starts. If your Bluetooth component recognizes the Bluetooth receiver, the model name (such as “YBA-10 YAMAHA”) will be displayed in the device list of your component. Searching... (BD/DVD) ARC Be sure to perform pairing when connecting a Bluetooth component to the Bluetooth receiver for the first time, or when the pairing setting has been deleted. DOCK DOCK HDMI OUT MUTE Pairing Bluetooth components VOL. SW PR PL C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR COMPONENT VIDEO FM REMOT PR IN PR R GND S VIDEO OUT 75Ω PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT +1 0.1A TRIGGER O • To cancel the search, press RETURN. L • You can also start the search by holding down MEMORY instead of step 3. (To cancel the search, press MEMORY again.) R OPTICAL AV 1 Bluetooth receiver COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) (TV) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 This unit (rear) 2 Turn on this unit. En 59 MAIN ZONE 2 the Bluetooth receiver from the device list 4 Select and enter the pass key “0000”. CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB PRESET TUNING “Completed” appears when the pairing is complete. DOCK AV FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV Completed • Depending on Bluetooth components, “BT connected” appears when the pairing is complete. In this case, the wireless connection has been already established. You just need to start playback on your Bluetooth component to enjoy it on this unit. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 5 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. SCENE CD RADIO OPTION OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY A SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR DOCK SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ON SCREEN VOL. Establishing a wireless connection and playing back When the pairing is complete, follow the procedure below to establish a wireless connection between your Bluetooth component and the Bluetooth receiver. When the connection is established, this unit outputs sounds played back on the Bluetooth component. • Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless connection is established automatically or by operating the Bluetooth component. In this case, you can skip steps 2 and 3 below. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. 1 Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source. 2 Press OPTION. the cursor keys to select “Connect” (Connect) 3 Use and then press ENTER. MUTE “BT connected” appears when the wireless connection is established. MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 DOCK BTconnected VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE • If the Bluetooth receiver is paired with more than one Bluetooth component, the lastly-connected component is automatically chosen. When you cannot establish a connection with an intended component, perform pairing again or perform the connection operation from the intended component. • “Not found” appears if a connection cannot be established. Check the followings and try again. - The Bluetooth component and Bluetooth receiver are paired. - The Bluetooth component is turned on and the Bluetooth mode is enabled. - The Bluetooth component is within 10 m of the Bluetooth receiver. 4 Start playback on your Bluetooth component. • To terminate the wireless connection, select “Disconnect” (Disconnect) in step 3. En 60 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Playing back music stored on a USB storage device SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO USB Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. MEMORY • This unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. SCENE BD DVD You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on this unit. Refer to the instruction manuals of the USB storage device in addition. This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs). TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN Connecting a USB storage device VOLUME ENTER RETURN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys MUTE 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. This unit (front) MODE PHONES 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 USB TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 4 8 SILENT CINEMA • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. the cursor keys to select an item and press 2 Use ENTER. iPod/iPhone ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. HDMI OUT MUTE USB USB storage device USB Connected VOL. SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by this unit are not listed. • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the files. In this case, “Loading” appears in the front display. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts (p.73) and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. En 61 MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Browse screen CODE SET ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER 1 2 3 HDMI 1 2 3 4 7 V-AUX 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB PRESET TUNING AV FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY 1 2 3 5 4 4 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 1 Status indicators ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.63) and playback status. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 Displays the artist name, album name, song title and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled. 3 Contents list Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 8 4 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Menu Function INPUT TV CH 3 Album image Submenu Function ENT TV TV VOL Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.63) and playback status. 2 Playback information 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN 1 Status indicators HDMI OUT 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. MUTE Stops playback. Play Control Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves to 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys ( remote control to control playback. , , , ) on the En 62 MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings CODE SET You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING AV INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY • The shuffle/repeat settings are shared by USB and network sources. “USB” is selected as the input source, press 1 When OPTION. the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or 2 Use “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys MUTE • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. the cursor keys ( 3 Use press ENTER. / ) to select a setting and MODE Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “ ” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. Single (Single) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “ 1 ” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “ ” appears in the TV screen. TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 63 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Playing back music stored on PCs SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNAcompatible NAS on this unit. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY Playback of PC music contents Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. NET • To use this function, this unit and your PC must be connected to the network properly (p.31). You can check whether the network parameters (IP address, etc.) are properly assigned to this unit in “Network” (p.102) in the “Information”. • This unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT NET repeatedly to select “PC” as the input 1 Press source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN Requirements VOLUME ENTER RETURN ENTER DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 MUTE TV CH This unit can play back music files stored on the following music servers. - PC with Windows Media Player 11 or later installed - PC with DLNA/UPnP certificate server software installed - NAS with DLNA/UPnP certification Media sharing setup ENT TV INPUT TV VOL Cursor keys HDMI OUT To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed that Windows Media Player 11 or later is 1 Check installed on your PC. the media sharing settings, enable the media 2 Insharing and select this unit as a device to which the • If playback of a music file selected from this unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. the cursor keys to select a music server and 2 Use press ENTER. the cursor keys to select an item and press 3 Use ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. media is shared. ■ For a NAS or a PC with other DLNA sever software installed Refer to the instruction manual of the device or software and configure the media sharing setting. En 64 MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Playback screen CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. 1 2 HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING • Files not supported by this unit are not listed (or cannot be selected even if listed). • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts (p.73) and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. AV INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY 1 2 3 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 Status indicators Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.66) and playback status (play/pause). SCENE TV CD RADIO 4 OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE Menu operation keys Cursor keys 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT TV TV CH HDMI OUT 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled. 5 3 Album image 1 Status indicators Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.66) and playback status (play/pause). 4 INPUT TV VOL 6 ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE 4 ■ Browse screen SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BD DVD 3 4 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. 2 List name 3 Contents list Menu Displays the list of PC contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Submenu Function Resumes playback from pause. MUTE Stops playback. 4 Album image 5 Item number/total Play Control 6 Operation menu Skips forward/backward. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Stops playback temporarily. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves to 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys ( remote control to control playback. , , , , ) on the • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.82). En 65 MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings CODE SET You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of PC music contents. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY AV • The shuffle/repeat settings are shared by USB and network sources. “PC” is selected as the input source, press 1 When OPTION. the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or 2 Use “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN OPTION • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. VOLUME ENTER RETURN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys the cursor keys ( 3 Use press ENTER. / ) to select a setting and MUTE MODE Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “ ” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. Single (Single) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “ 1 ” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “ ” appears in the TV screen. TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 66 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Listening to Internet radio SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can listen to Internet radio stations using the vTuner Internet radio station database service particularly customized for this unit, providing a database of numerous radio stations in the world. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO • To use this function, this unit must be connected to the Internet (p.31). You can check whether the network parameters (IP address, etc.) are properly assigned to this unit in “Network” (p.102) in the “Information”. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC SLEEP PARTY ENHANCER PURE DIRECT TV CD NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the 1 Press input source. RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE 4 • This service may be discontinued without notice. • Some Internet radio stations may not be played. SCENE BD DVD 1 2 3 NET MEMORY MOVIE ■ Browse screen Menu operation keys Cursor keys The browse screen is displayed on the TV. 6 5 1 Playback indicator 2 List name 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN Displays the list of Internet radio contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. MODE 4 Station art 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 5 Item number/total 6 Operation menu ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH HDMI OUT the cursor keys to select an item and press 2 Use ENTER. If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Bookmark On Adds the station selected in the list to “Bookmarks”. 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves to 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • You can register your favorite Internet radio stations as shortcuts (p.73) and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. En 67 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER • By adding your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can access to them quickly from “Bookmarks”. To remove stations from “Bookmarks”, select the station in “Bookmarks” and then “Bookmark Off”. HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 SCENE TV CD ) on the remote ■ Playback screen SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT BD DVD , • You can also register your favorite Internet radio stations by accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need the vTuner ID of this unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account. You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of this unit) in the “Network” screen (p.102) in the “Information” menu. http://yradio.vtuner.com/ AV TUNER • You can also use the external device operation keys ( control to control playback. RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE 3 Menu operation keys Cursor keys 4 ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE 1 Playback indicators 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 ENT TV TV VOL Displays the station name and elapsed time. 3 Station art INPUT MUTE 2 Playback information TV CH HDMI OUT 4 Operation menu Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function Bookmark On Adds the current station to “Bookmarks”. Play Control Stops playback. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 68 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back separate input sources in the room where this unit is installed (main zone) and another room (Zone2). For example, while you are watching a TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to radio in the bedroom (Zone2). ■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to this unit with speaker cables. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. This unit (rear) Bedroom (Zone2) Living room (main zone) • Only analog audio signals (including radio, USB and network sources) can be output to Zone2. To listen to playback sounds of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV5~6, AUDIO1~2 or VIDEO AUX jacks) of this unit. The party mode (p.72) allows you to enjoy main zone sources in Zone2 simultaneously regardless of input audio signal types. Zone2 Preparing for Zone2 Connect devices to be set in Zone2 to this unit. The connection method varies depending on an amplifier to use (this unit or external amplifier). Caution Main zone • When Zone2 output is enabled (p.71), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. • Remove the power cable of this unit from an AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. • Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES” will appear on the front display when this unit is turned on. En 69 ■ Using an external amplifier Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 to this unit with a stereo pin cable. This unit (rear) HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 R COMPONENT VIDEO FM FRONT By connecting an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks of this unit, you can operate this unit and external devices from Zone2 with the supplied remote control. HDMI • To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, register a remote control code for each device in advance (p.106). (BD/DVD) NNA ■ Operating this unit from Zone2 (remote connection) L CEN REMOTE IN PR ZONE2 OUT jacks OUT 75Ω PB Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT This unit (rear) +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT WORK AV UT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 OUT HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) O ANTENNA AM HDMI 2 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (BD/DVD) ARC REMOTE COMPONENT VIDEO FM REMOTE IN IN PR GND S VIDEO OUT 75Ω OUT PB Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT L R OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver Zone2 Main zone External device (CD player, etc.) Remote control Zone2 Main zone En 70 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET MAIN/ZONE2 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY V-AUX AV PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT Controlling Zone2 1 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. 2 Press RECEIVER AV5~6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE TV CD RADIO DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Remote control MUTE MODE Zone2 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 OUT OUT 3 Use the following keys to select an input source. V-AUX: VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks (on the front panel) AV5~6: AV5~6 (AUDIO) jacks AUDIO: AUDIO1~2 jacks (press repeatedly to switch between “AUDIO1” and “AUDIO2”) DOCK: DOCK jack TUNER: FM/AM radio PHONO: PHONO jacks NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source USB: USB jack (on the front panel) 8 ENT TV TV CH Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or disabled. When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. 4 INPUT MUTE IN Yamaha products (up to 6, including this unit) VOLUME ENTER TV VOL REMOTE IN Infrared signal receiver OPTION ON SCREEN RETURN REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD Remote connections between Yamaha products If you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections like this unit, an infrared signal transmitter is unnecessary. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. HDMI OUT • You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “PC” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “PC”. En 71 MAIN ZONE 2 playback on the external device, or select a 4 Start radio station. CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 7 V-AUX 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING Refer to the instruction manual of the external device. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. - Listening to FM/AM radio (p.50) - Playing back iPod music (p.54) - Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.59) - Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.61) - Playing back music stored on PCs (p.64) - Listening to Internet radio (p.67) AV INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP PARTY SCENE BD DVD TV CD ■ Enjoying main zone sources in Zone2 (party mode) The party mode allows you to enjoy main zone sources in Zone2 simultaneously. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to play back main sources as background music in a home party, etc. 1 Press PARTY. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or web control (p.74) to control Zone2. VOLUME ENTER RETURN • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). VOLUME DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 MUTE • To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of time. • To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (available only when using the internal amplifier of this unit). ENT Caution TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH HDMI OUT • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. En 72 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Useful functions SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 3 4 7 V-AUX 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB PRESET TUNING 1 2 5 6 Registering favorite items (shortcut) AV 1 FM AM INFO MEMORY NET USB MEMORY PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY ENHANCER PURE DIRECT TV CD RADIO RETURN 1 Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. 2 Press MEMORY. VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MEMORY MUTE VOL. SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR 01:Empty MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Numeric keys You can also enter a shortcut number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys. 01:USB VOL. SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR • “No Presets” appears when no items are registered. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases. - A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to this unit. - The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service. ENT TV MUTE 1 Press NET or USB. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired item. - A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network. Shortcut number (flashes) - The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location. INPUT TV VOL Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number. RECALL Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number. OPTION ON SCREEN • You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.67). ■ Registering an item SCENE BD DVD You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. ■ Recalling a registered item TV CH HDMI OUT • To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET or numeric keys to select the shortcut number after step 2. MEMORY 02:Empty • When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again. VOL. SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR “Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered 3 To confirm the registration, press MEMORY. En 73 Controlling this unit from the web browser (web control) ■ Top menu screen You can control this unit with the web control screen displayed in the web browser. 1 Web browser Web control PC Web control Router This unit 5 2 6 3 4 7 1 CONTROL Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. • To use this function, this unit and your PC must be connected to the network properly (p.31). • Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of this unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software appropriately. • We recommend using Internet Explorer 7.x or 8.x as a web browser. 2 STATUS Turns on/off the power for each zone, or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. 3 SETTINGS Moves to the settings screen. 4 PARTY MODE • If you set “Network Standby” (p.75) to “On”, you can display the web control screen even when this unit is in standby mode. • You can limit access to this unit from the network devices (PCs, etc.) with the MAC address filter (p.75). 1 Start the web browser. the IP address of this unit in the address bar 2 Enter of the web browser. Turns on/off the party mode (p.72). 5 SYSTEM POWER Turns on/off the power for all zones. 6 MAIN VOLUME Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also switch the step for the volume adjustment. 7 RELOAD Reloads the current status of this unit. You can check the IP address in “Network” (p.102) in the “Information” menu. • By adding the IP address of this unit to the bookmark of the browser, you will be able to open it without entering the IP address from the next time. However, the IP address of this unit may change if you are using a DHCP server. En 74 ■ Control screen ■ Settings screen 3 1 4 1 5 2 6 1 PLAY INFO Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone. 2 TOP MENU Moves to the top menu screen. 3 SCENE Select a scene for the main zone. 4 POWER Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. 5 VOLUME Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also switch the step for the volume adjustment. (These functions are available only when the internal amplifier of this unit is used.) 6 RELOAD Reloads the current status of this unit. 2 3 1 Rename Edits the friendly name (name for this unit in the network) or the name of each zone (p.99). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to this unit. MAC Filter Sets the MAC address filter (p.98) to limit access to this unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to this unit. Auto Reload Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of this unit every 5 seconds. Network Standby Enables/disables the network standby function (p.98). Tips 1/ 2 Displays the tips for use of the web control. Create Link Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen. Backup/Recovery Creates backup of the settings of this unit on the PC, or restores the settings from the backup. 2 BACK Moves to the top menu screen. 3 RELOAD Reloads the current status of this unit. En 75 MAIN ZONE 2 Note • Do not operate this unit during the recovery process (restoring the settings). Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set this unit to standby mode. HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ■ Switching information on the front display ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 SCENE TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the display item switches. INFO VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH * When using iPod wireless system, Bluetooth receiver, or during simple play: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) * When iPod is connected via USB, the display item switches in the same manner as “DOCK”. NET RADIO Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) MUTE Item name 0 PC USB VOL. DSPProgram MODE 9 DOCK Viewing the current status * When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station, Radio Data System data is also available (p.51). Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name) , DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) INFO INFO RETURN TUNER • The backup does not contain user information (user account, password, etc.) or unit-specific information (MAC address, IP address, etc). AV BD DVD Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI OUT About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information appears. HDMI1 1 Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. VOL. TheRoxytheat ■ Viewing the status information on the TV SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR MUTE Input source Volume Information • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. Also, the display item can be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item HDMI1~7 V-AUX AV1~6 AUDIO1~2 PHONO Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode CINEMA DSP status 2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. En 76 Configuring settings in accordance with a playback source (Option menu) You can configure the playback-related settings in accordance with a playback source. Since this menu is operational on the front panel (or on the TV screen), you can easily configure the settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. OPTION ToneControl Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. VOL. SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR Front display TV screen 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting and press ENTER. Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. Page 78 Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is adjusted automatically in conjunction with adjusting the volume level. 78 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 78 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Adjusts the vertical position of center sound when presence speakers are used. 78 Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) Selects the 5.1 to 7.1-channel signal playback method when surround back speakers are used. 79 Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. 79 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 79 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) Searches for a traffic information station automatically. 52 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.58), USB storage device (p.63) or PC (p.66). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.58), USB storage device (p.63) or PC (p.66). — Connect/Disconnect (Connect/Disconnect) Establishes/terminates a wireless connection between your Bluetooth component and the Bluetooth receiver. 60 Pairing (Pairing) Performs pairing of your Bluetooth component and the Bluetooth receiver. 59 En 77 ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of speaker sounds. When connecting headphones, you can adjust high-frequency range and lowfrequency range of sounds output from headphones. Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions according to the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Settings Setting range -6.0db ~ Bypass (Bypass) ~ +6.0dB *0.5dB steps Default Bypass (Bypass) On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. ■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) • If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. Adjusting with the front panel controls a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”. b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Adjusts the vertical position of center sound such as dialogues when presence speakers are used. If dialogues are heard from a position lower than the TV screen, adjust this setting to raise the position. Setting range 0~5 (higher raises the position) Default 0 ■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is adjusted automatically in conjunction with adjusting the volume level. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at low volume at night. Ideal position Settings On (On) Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Off (Off) (default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically. If “On” is selected,” the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume, and becomes wide at a high volume. On Off Input level Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low On Off Input level En 78 ■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.49). Settings • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Auto (Auto) (default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. When the DTS or DTS-HD signal is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 7.1-channel regardless of a flag for surround back channel. ( PLIIx Movie PLIIxMo) Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround back speakers are connected. ( PLIIx Music PLIIxMu) Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder, and reproduces signals in 6.1-channel. Off (Off) Always reproduces signals in original channels. Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, DOCK, (network sources), USB: On (On) Others: Off (Off) ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0dB ~ +6.0dB (0.5dB steps) Default 0.0dB En 79 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring input sources (Input menu) 4 Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 Press ON SCREEN. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. the cursor keys ( / ) to select an input source to be configured 3 Use and press the cursor key ( ). 5 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The input source of this unit also changes. Item Function Page Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 81 Audio In Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. 81 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 81 Standby Charge Selects whether to charge the iPod when this unit is in standby mode. 81 iPod Interlock Selects whether to control this unit in conjunction with iPod operations. 82 Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 82 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 82 • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys ( / ) after step 3. En 80 ■ Rename/Icon Select (To input audio through analog audio jacks) Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the corresponding audio jacks of this unit with a stereo pin cable. Input sources HDMI1~7, AV1~6, V-AUX, AUDIO1~2, PHONO, USB, DOCK ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an icon and press the cursor key ( ). 2 Press ENTER, use the cursor keys to rename, and then press ENTER again. ■ Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. For example, if this unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources HDMI1~7, AV1~4, V-AUX Settings 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Audio In Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Standby Charge Selects whether to charge the iPod connected to the iPod dock or iPod wireless system when this unit is in standby mode. Input sources DOCK (iPod) Settings On (default) Charges the iPod even when this unit is in standby mode. Off Does not charge the iPod when this unit is in standby mode. • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output but not HDMI audio output • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (game consoles, etc.) Input sources HDMI1~7, AV1~2 ■ Setup procedure (To input audio through a digital optical jack) Select “AV1” or “AV4”, and connect the device to the corresponding audio jacks of this unit with a digital optical cable. (To input audio through a digital coaxial jack) Select “AV2” or “AV3”, and connect the device to the corresponding audio jacks of this unit with a digital coaxial cable. En 81 ■ iPod Interlock ■ DMC Control Selects whether to control this unit in conjunction with operations of the iPod connected to the iPod wireless system. Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input sources DOCK (iPod) Input source PC Settings • This function is available only when an iPod wireless system is connected to this unit. Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. ❑ Power & Input Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback. Selects whether to control the power and input source selection of this unit in conjunction with iPod operations. Settings On (default) Enables power and input interlocking controls. When you start playback of the iPod, this unit turns on and “DOCK” is selected as the input source. When you stop playback, this unit enters standby mode after a short time. Off Disables power and input interlocking controls. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of this unit from DMCs (Windows Media Player 12, etc.) on the same network. • When “Power & Input” is set to “On”, the iPod connected to the iPod wireless system is charged regardless of the “Standby Charge” setting (p.81). ❑ Volume Selects whether to control the volume of this unit in conjunction with iPod operations. Settings On (default) Enables volume interlocking controls. When you adjust the iPod volume, the volume of the unit is also adjusted. Off Disables volume interlocking control. ■ Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Input sources TUNER, (network sources), USB Settings Off (default) Does not output videos. HDMI1~7, AV1~6, V-AUX Outputs videos input through the corresponding video input jacks. En 82 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.44) using the TV screen. 1 Press ON SCREEN. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. the cursor keys ( 3 Use cursor key ( ). / ) to select a scene to be configured and press the 5 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Scene menu items Item Function Page Save Registers the settings currently applied to this unit to the selected scene. 83 Load Loads the settings registered to selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. 84 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 84 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 84 ■ Save Registers the settings currently applied to this unit (input source, sound program/ surround decoder and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack) to the selected scene. • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.44). • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys ( / ) after step 3. 4 Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER. En 83 ■ Load ■ Rename/Icon Select Loads the settings registered to selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. ❑ Device Control Enables to start playback of external devices connected to this unit via HDMI or a Yamaha product connected to the REMOTE OUT jack, in conjunction with a scene selection (SCENE link playback) ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an icon and press the cursor key ( ). 2 Press ENTER, use the cursor keys to rename, and then press ENTER again. Settings Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if HDMI Control-compatible device (BD/DVD players, etc.) is connected to this unit via HDMI. It also turns on the HDMI Control-compatible TV concurrently. IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1 Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack. Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 2 if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack and “IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1” does not work properly. IR: Yamaha CD Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this if a Yamaha CD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack. Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (CD): IR: Yamaha CD SCENE4 (RADIO): Off 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.44) for the selected scene. • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.123). ❑ Detail Displays the assignments of the selected scene. Input Input source to be used HDMI Output HDMI OUT jack to be used Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off En 84 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) 4 Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. 1 Press ON SCREEN. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. the cursor keys ( / ) to select a sound program to be 3 Use configured and press the cursor key ( ). 5 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys ( / ) after step 3. En 85 Sound Program menu items Item Function Settings Reverb Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and rear reverberant sound generation. 0 ms ~ 250ms Higher to enhance the delay effect and lower to reduce. Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% ~ 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound and lower to weaken. • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. ■ Settings for sound programs Item Function Settings Decode Type Selects a surround decoder to be used in combination with the selected sound program. PLIIx Movie ( PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6dB ~ +3dB (default: 0dB) Higher to enhance the sound field effect and lower to reduce. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1ms ~ 99ms Higher to enhance the delay effect and lower to reduce. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Sound program 2ch Stereo 1ms ~ 49ms Higher to enhance the delay effect and lower to reduce. 0.1 ~ 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect and lower to reduce. 0 ~ 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity and lower to reduce. 1.0s ~ 5.0s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Item Function Settings Direct Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP and tone control circuits when an analog audio source is played back. Auto (default), Off Select “Auto” to bypass the circuits (when both “Treble” and “Bass” are set to “Bypass”). Center Level Adjusts the volume of the center channel. Surround L Level Adjusts the volume of the surround left channel. Surround R Level Adjusts the volume of the surround right channel. Surround Back Level Adjusts the volume of the surround back channel. Surround Back L Level Adjusts the volume of the surround back left channel. Surround Back R Level Adjusts the volume of the surround back right channel. Front Presence L Level Adjusts the volume of the front presence left channel. Front Presence R Level Adjusts the volume of the front presence right channel. 0% ~ 100% (default: 100%) 0% ~ 100% (default: 50%) 7ch Stereo 0% ~ 100% (default: 35%) 0% ~ 100% (default: 33%) • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. En 86 ■ Settings for decoders The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “Surround Decoder” to “PLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type PLIIx Music Neo:6 Music Item Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off (default), On Select “On” to wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 ~ 7 (default: 3) Higher to enhance the broadening effect and lower to reduce (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 ~ +3 (default: 0) Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 ~ 1.0 (default: 0.3) Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). En 87 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the various functions of this unit using the TV screen. 5 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 Press ON SCREEN. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a menu. 4 Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. En 88 Setup menu items Menu Item Function Auto Setup Optimizes the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). 36 Selects a speaker system. 91 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 91 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 91 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and its size. 91 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and its size. 92 Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 92 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 92 Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 92 Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component produced from speakers of which the size is set to “Small”. 92 Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 92 Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 93 Power Amp Assign Page Configuration Speaker Manual Setup Distance Level PEQ Select Selects a type of equalizer to be used. 93 PEQ Data Copy Copies the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment. 93 Enables/disabled the test tone output. 93 Parametric EQ Test Tone Sound Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. 94 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 94 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume so that sound is not too loud. 94 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 94 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level in conjunction with volume adjustments. 94 Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks. 95 Processing Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 95 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (ARC, TV audio input, etc). 96 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 97 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when this unit is in standby mode. 97 IP Address Configures the network parameters (IP address, etc). 97 Network Standby Selects whether or not to turn on this unit by the command from other network devices. 98 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to this unit from other network devices. 98 Video HDMI Network En 89 Menu Item Function Page Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume so that sound is not too loud. 98 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when this unit is turned on. 98 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 99 Zone Rename Changes the zone names displayed on the TV screen. 99 Zone2 Set Multi Zone Sets the amount of time for auto-standby. 99 Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 99 Scroll Sets the scrolling manner of the front display. 99 Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when this unit is operated. 100 Auto Power Down Front Panel Display Display Set Short Message Wall Paper Selects a wall paper displayed on the TV. 100 Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 100 Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized. 100 Target Source Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input switching. 100 Manual Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually. 100 Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 100 Select an on-screen menu language. 101 Function Trigger Output Memory Guard Language En 90 Speaker (Manual Setup) Configures the speaker settings manually. ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm or larger or “small” if it is smaller than 16 cm. ❑ Front Selects the size of the front speakers. Settings ■ Power Amp Assign Large Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Selects a speaker system. In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers or bi-amp connection. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Settings ❑ Center Basic (default) Select this when you use a normal speaker system (not to use Zone2 speakers or bi-amp connection). 7ch+1ZONE Select this when you use Zone2 speakers (p.69) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone. Settings 5ch BI-AMP Select this when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp connections (p.19). Large Select this for large speaker. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this for small speaker. The subwoofer will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. ❑ Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and its size. Settings Large Select this for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. En 91 ❑ Surround Back ❑ Extra Bass Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and its size. Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. Settings Settings Large x1 Select this when 1 large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Select this when 2 large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this when 1 small speaker is connected. The subwoofer will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Small x2 (default) Select this when 2 small speakers are connected. The subwoofer will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce surround back channel audio. Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel lowfrequency components. • This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None” or “Front” is set to “Small”. ❑ Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component produced from speakers of which the size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers Settings 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (default), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz ❑ Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. Settings Use (default) Select this when presence speakers are connected. None Select this when no presence speakers are connected. ❑ Subwoofer Selects whether or not subwoofer is connected and its phase. Settings Normal (default) Select this when a subwoofer is connected (not to reverse the phase). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this when a subwoofer is connected (reverse the phase). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Use None • If the volume and cross-over frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. ■ Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Setting range 0.30m ~ 24.00m (1.0ft ~ 80.0ft) *0.05m (0.2ft) steps Default 3.00m (10.0ft) Select this when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. En 92 ■ Level ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0dB ~ +10.0dB (0.5dB steps) 1 Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Band / Gain: You can select a center frequency from the preset 7 bands and adjust the gain. Freq. / Gain: You can adjust the center frequency of the selected band and adjust the gain. Q / Gain: You can adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and adjust the gain. Default 0.0dB Clear: Restores the default settings for the selected speaker. 4 Use the cursor keys to adjust parameters and press ENTER. ■ Parametric EQ Adjusts sound quality of tone with an equalizer. ❑ PEQ Select Setting range Gain: -20.0dB ~ +6.0dB (0.5dB steps) Center frequency: 31.3Hz ~ 16.0kHz Q factor: 0.500 ~ 10.08 Selects a type of equalizer to be used. Settings Manual Select this when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the characteristics same as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Test Tone • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front” and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.36). ❑ PEQ Data Copy Enables/disabled the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Settings Copies the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.36) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment. Choices Flat > Manual Copies the “Flat” values acquired with “Auto Setup”. Front > Manual Copies the “Front” values acquired with “Auto Setup”. Natural > Manual Copies the “Natural” values acquired with “Auto Setup”. Off (default) Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance, equalizer, etc. En 93 Sound ■ Dynamic Range Configures the audio output settings. Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. ❑ Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to this unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing. “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. Setting range 0ms ~ 250ms (1ms steps) Default 0ms ❑ Manual Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. Setting range 0ms ~ 250ms (1ms steps) Default 0ms Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range to make clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume so that sound is not too loud. Setting range -30.0dB ~ +15.0dB (5.0dB steps), +16.5dB Default +16.5dB ■ Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets at the level when this unit last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute, or -80.0dB ~ +16.5dB (0.5dB steps). (This setting works only when “Max Volume” is set higher.) ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level in conjunction with volume adjustments. Settings Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically. En 94 ■ Processing Video Configures the video output settings. Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Off (default) Disables the video signal processing. On Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. • 720p-, 1080i- and 1080p-resolution video signals cannot be converted (p.122). ❑ Resolution ■ Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion (p.122) between the analog video jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO). Settings Off Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks. On (default) Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks. Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks only. • This unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Processing” is set to “On”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.104) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that output videos may not be displayed on your TV normally.) • 480p/576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals cannot be output from the VIDEO jacks (p.122). ❑ Aspect Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Processing” is set to “On”. Settings Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals. En 95 ❑ ARC HDMI Enables/disables ARC (p.21) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Configures the settings related to HDMI. Settings Off Disables ARC. On (default) Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to this unit because TV audio signals input to this unit via ARC are not supported by this unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV speaker. ❑ Standby Sync Select whether to set this unit to standby in conjunction with TV power-off when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. ■ HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.123). Settings Settings Off (default) Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. Off Does not set this unit to standby mode in conjunction with TV power-off. On Sets this unit to standby mode in conjunction with TV poweroff. Auto (default) Sets this unit to standby mode in conjunction with TV power-off only when this unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.123) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. ❑ TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of this unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The input source of this unit automatically switches to TV audio (input jack selected in here) when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AV1~6, AUDIO1~2 Default AV4 • When using ARC to input TV audio to this unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected in here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. En 96 ■ Audio Output Network Selects a device to output audio. Configures the network settings. • The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. ❑ Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to this unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers. ❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT 2 jack. Settings ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (IP address, etc). ❑ DHCP Select whether to use a DHCP server. Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. ■ Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when this unit is in standby mode. Settings Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the network parameters (IP address, etc.) of this unit. ❑ Manual Setup Configures the network parameters of this unit manually when “DHCP” is set to “Off”. Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (This unit consumes approximately 3 W of power.) • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. Submenu IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. En 97 ■ Network Standby Multi Zone Selects whether to turn on this unit by the command from other network devices (network standby). Configures the multi zone settings. Settings Off (default) Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (This unit consumes approximately 5 W of power.) ■ MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to this unit from other network devices. ❑ Mode Enables/disables the MAC address filter. ■ Zone2 Set Configures the audio output settings for Zone2. Settings Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “Address Setup”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to this unit. ❑ Address Setup Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to this unit when “Mode” is set to “On”. • The “Zone2 Set” settings are available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) is set to “7ch+1ZONE” ❑ Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume so that sound is not too loud. Setting range -30.0dB ~ +15.0dB (5.0dB steps), +16.5dB Default +16.5dB ❑ Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when this unit is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets at the level when this unit last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute, or -80.0dB ~ +16.5dB (0.5dB steps). (This setting works only when “Max Volume” is set higher.) En 98 ■ Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.72). Function Configures the functions that make this unit easier to use. Choice Target: Zone 2 Settings Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable (default) Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. ■ Zone Rename Changes the zone names displayed on the TV screen. ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys to select a zone to be renamed and press ENTER. 2 Press ENTER, use the cursor keys to rename, and then press ENTER again. ■ Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for auto-standby. If you do not operate this unit for the specified time, this unit will automatically go into standby mode. Settings Off Does not set this unit to standby mode automatically. 4 Hours, 8 Hours (default), Sets this unit to standby mode when you have not operated this unit for the 12 Hours specified time. ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. ❑ Front Panel Display Configures the front display settings. Dimmer • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Setting range -4 ~ 0 (higher to brighten) Default 0 Scroll Sets the scrolling manner of the front display. The display scrolls automatically if the text exceeds 14 characters. Settings Continue (default) Sets the display to scroll continuously. Once Sets the display to scroll all characters once and then halt scrolling for display of the first 14 characters. En 99 ❑ Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when this unit is operated (input selection, volume adjustment, etc). Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in Zone2. All (default) When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in the main zone or Zone2. Settings On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. ❑ Wall Paper ❑ Target Source Selects a wall paper displayed on the TV. Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Settings Picture1, Picture2, Picture3 Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. ■ Trigger Output Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function synchronized with power status of each zone or input switching. ❑ Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Settings Power (default) Choices HDMI1~7, AV1~6, V-AUX, AUDIO1~2, TUNER, PHONO, (network sources), USB, DOCK Settings Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. ❑ Manual Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external component connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone.” Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone.” Electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Target Source.” Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual.” Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal. ■ Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings ❑ Target Zone Off (default) Does not protect the settings. Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Settings Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in the main zone. En 100 Language Select an on-screen menu language. Viewing information about this unit (Information menu) You can view information about this unit using the TV screen. 1 Press ON SCREEN. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Settings English (default) English Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish 3 Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an information type. Russian • The information on the front display is provided in English only. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 101 ■ Network Types of information Displays the network information on this unit. ■ Audio Signal IP Address IP address Displays information about the current audio signal. Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server Format Audio format of the input signal Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/ surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Input Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Dialogue Output DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server MAC Address MAC address Status Network connection status The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal ■ System The speaker terminals from which signals are output Displays the system information on this unit. • Even when this unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. ■ Video Signal Remote ID The remote control ID setting of the main unit (p.104) TV Format The video signal type setting of this unit (p.104) Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of this unit (p.103) System ID System ID number Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on this unit Displays information about the current video signal. HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) HDMI Error Errors related to HDMI HDCP Error: The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Device Over: The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. • If this unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the firmware of this unit by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the firmware of this unit” (p.110). ■ Zone Displays information about Zone2. Input The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume setting for Zone2 ■ HDMI Monitor Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. Use the cursor keys ( / ) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV En 102 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Item Function You can configure the system settings of this unit using the front display. SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 103 1 Set this unit to standby mode. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the font panel, press MAIN ZONE REMOTE ID Selects the remote control ID of the main unit. 104 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 104 MAIN ZONE PROGRAM STRAIGHT 3 Press PROGRAM to select an item. 4 Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. MAIN ZONE to set this unit to standby mode and turn it on 5 Press again. The new settings become effective. . Page MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 104 INIT Restores the default settings. 104 UPDATE Updates the firmware. 105 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on this unit. 105 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) SPIMP.-8MIN Change the speaker impedance settings of unit depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings 6 Ω MIN Select this when you connect 6-ohm speakers to this unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8 Ω MIN (default) Select this when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to this unit. En 103 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) REMOTEID-ID1 Select the remote control ID of the main unit so that it matches to the ID of the remote control (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1 (default), ID2 ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be automatically canceled. 1 Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. 2 Press SOURCE/RECEIVER. 3 Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2). Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. If it blinks 6 times, registration failed. Repeat from step 1. Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) TVFORMAT-PAL Switch the video signal type of this unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL (default) Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) MON.CHK-YES This unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. If you want to select a resolution in “Resolution” (p.95) regardless of the detection results or if this unit does not detect it correctly, disable the monitor check function. Settings YES (default) Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) • The registered remote control codes (p.106) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID. • In case this unit becomes inoperable because videos from this unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MON.CHK” is set to “SKIP”, reset the setting to “YES. Restoring the default settings (INIT) INIT-CANCEL Restores the default settings for the selected item. Choices VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for this unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. En 104 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) New firmware will be released irregularly for the purpose of additional features or product improvements. It can be downloaded from our website. If this unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. VOL. MUTE UPDATE-USB SW PR PL C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • If this unit detects a newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the firmware of this unit by following the procedure in “Updating the firmware of this unit” (p.110). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) Check the version of firmware currently installed on this unit. VOL. MUTE VERSION-x.xx SW PR PL C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.102) in the “Information” menu. En 105 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER CODE SET SOURCE/RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB FM AM PRESET TUNING INFO MEMORY Controlling external devices with the remote control By setting the code for external devices (BD/DVD players, etc.), you can operate it with the remote control of this unit. AV • You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor. • Make sure the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the registered codes may be cleared. In this case, insert new batteries and setting the codes again. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO • When HDMI control of both this unit and playback device such as a BD/DVD player are enabled, you may be able to control the device with the remote control without registering the remote control code. OPTION ON SCREEN DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Once you have set the remote control code for your TV, you can control it using the TV operation keys regardless of an input source selected on this unit. MUTE By setting the remote control code for your TV, you can operate it with the remote control of this unit. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT TV CH HDMI OUT TV operation keys INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV. MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV. TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV. TV CH Switch the channels of the TV TV Turns on/off the TV. Numeric keys TV TV VOL ■ TV operations Setting the remote control code for a TV MODE MUTE Once the remote control code is set successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. If it blinks 6 times, registration failed. Repeat from step 2. VOLUME ENTER RETURN 3 Press TV the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote 4 Use control code. TV operation keys TV • You can also register a remote control code of your TV to the input selection keys (p.107). In this case, you can use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV depending on its model. However, you need to press the corresponding input selection key to play back TV audio on this unit. • You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.108). “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM 1 Use to find a remote control code for your TV. • If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it does not work then try the other codes. CODE SET using a pointed object such as the 2 Press tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat from step 2. En 106 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE CODE SET SOURCE/RECEIVER Setting the remote control codes for playback devices HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB PRESET TUNING AV FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY Input selection key • At the factory, Yamaha CD player code (5095) is set for AV3. For the other input selection keys, no codes are set. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT • You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.108). ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY D POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Menu operation keys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Numeric keys TV operation keys TV CH • By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (this unit or external device) to operate with the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You can operate this unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate FM/AM radio built in this unit when SOURCE/ RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when SOURCE/ RECEIVER lights up in green. SOURCE Menu operation keys HDMI OUT Turns on/off the playback device. Cursor keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. TOP MENU Displays the top menu. POP-UP MENU Displays the pop-up menu. DISPLAY ENT TV INPUT TV VOL Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the input source or scene. DISPLAY External device operation keys 10 device. MUTE MODE MUTE “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM 1 Use to find a remote control code for your playback RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN By setting the remote control codes for your playback devices, you can operate those devices with the remote control of this unit. Since the codes are assigned to each input source key, you can select the input source and device to control with the remote control concurrently. ■ Playback device operations • If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it does not work then try the other codes. CODE SET using a pointed object such as the 2 Press tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat from step 2. Stops playback. Stops playback temporarily. External device operation keys For example, press HDMI1 to set the remote control code for the playback device connected to the HDMI1 jack. Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. If it blinks 6 times, registration failed. Repeat from step 2. Starts playback of the selected song/ video. Search forward/backward (by holding down). 3 Press a corresponding input selection key. the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote 4 Use control code. Switches information on the display. Skip forward/backward. Numeric keys Enter numerical values. TV operation keys Control the TV (p.106). • These keys work only when the corresponding function is available on your playback device and is possible to be operated with an infrared remote control. • For details on how to register the input selection key applied the remote control code on a corresponding SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene assignments” (p.44). En 107 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE CODE SET SOURCE/RECEIVER Programming from other remote controls (learning) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB PRESET TUNING The remote control of this unit can receive remote control signals from other remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work after you set the remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function to each key. AV FM AM INFO MEMORY CODE SET using a pointed object such as the 1 Press tip of a ballpoint pen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat from step 1. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE External device operation keys MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 TV TV VOL TV CH Numeric keys ENT INPUT MUTE Menu operation keys DISPLAY A HDMI OUT TV operation keys TV one of the following keys depending on the 2 Press type of your device. For playback device: press the input selection key (corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected). For TV: press TV . 3 Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”. the infrared transmitters of the remote controls 4 Aim at each other. Remote control of external device 5 Perform the following steps within 10 seconds. a On this unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to assign a function. For playback device: SOURCE external device operation keys , menu operations keys, For TV: TV operation keys b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is learned. Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE/ RECEIVER blinks twice. If it blinks 6 times, learning failed. Repeat step 5. step 5 until all desired operations are 6 Repeat learned. CODE SET using a pointed object such as the 7 Press tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks once. Note • If you press SOURCE/RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control this unit impossible. If you need to restore the remote control code for this unit, perform the following steps. a Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. b Press SOURCE/RECEIVER. c Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”. 2 6 USB DOCK ZONE 2 5 AUDIO MAIN 1 6 1 5 NET 2 HDMI 3 4 V-AUX 4 CODE SET 7 TUNING 3 SOURCE RECEIVER AV PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT AM MEMORY PHONO MUSIC RADIO FM INFO CD ENHANCER PURE DIRECT TUNER MOVIE PARTY OPTION SCENE TV SLEEP BD DVD ON SCREEN 5 to 10 cm apart En 108 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER CODE SET SOURCE/RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB PRESET TUNING FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY BD DVD TV Input selection key • The settings for controlling playback devices after selecting a scene (p.44) will be also cleared. CODE SET using a pointed object such as the 1 Press tip of a ballpoint pen. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat from step 1. SCENE RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN 2 Press SOURCE/RECEIVER. 3 Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”. DISPLAY A POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 4 8 Numeric keys TV MUTE TV TV CH Once the remote control codes are reset successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. If it blinks 6 times, resetting failed. Repeat from step 1. ENT INPUT TV VOL ■ Resetting all remote control codes You can clear all remote control codes (including functions learned from other remote controls) and restore the default settings. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT CD Resetting remote control codes HDMI OUT ■ Clearing functions learned from other remote controls ❑ Clearing the assignment of each key CODE SET using a pointed object such as the 1 Press tip of a ballpoint pen. 3 Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”. 4 Press the key that you want to reset. Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. If it blinks 6 times, clearing failed. Repeat from step 2. step 4 until all desired key assignments are 5 Repeat cleared. CODE SET using a pointed object such as the 6 Press tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks once. ❑ Clearing the key assignments for each input source CODE SET using a pointed object such as the 1 Press tip of a ballpoint pen. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat from step 1. one of the following keys to select the device 2 Press for which key assignments will be cleared. For playback device: press the input selection key. For TV: press TV . 3 Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”. Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. If it blinks 6 times, clearing failed. Repeat from step 1. SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat from step 1. one of the following keys to select the device 2 Press for which key assignments will be cleared. For playback device: press the input selection key. For TV: press TV . En 109 MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Updating the firmware of this unit SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO DOCK TUNER PHONO NET USB If this unit is connected to the Internet, the corresponding message will be displayed on the TV when a newer firmware is available. In this case, follow the procedure below to update the firmware of this unit. AV “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” 3 Ifappears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. Note FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP PARTY PRESET • Do not operate this unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 15 minutes. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.105). OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY A If the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed, firmware update is available. MUTE Information icon MODE 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in step 2. In this case, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.102). You can update the firmware of this unit by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. 4 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH HDMI OUT MUTE 1 Read the on-screen description. start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to 2 To select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. Message System icon En 110 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... I want to turn off the onscreen messages displayed during operations... If you have changed speakers or speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.36). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.91). By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when this unit is operated (input selection, volume adjustment, etc). In case that the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child, etc. accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. And this may cause injury or damage this unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for this unit in advance (p.94). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.98). I am occasionally startled by a sudden large sound when turning on this unit... By default, the volume level when this unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” to set the volume to be applied when this receiver is turned on (p.94). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.98). I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.123). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (TV, BD/DVD players, etc.) to this unit, enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time when you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals of each device. I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on this unit (speaker settings, etc.) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.100). The web control screen (p.74) becomes inaccessible... If you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of this unit may change each time this unit is turned on. Check the IP address of this unit in “Network” (p.102) in the “Information” menu. Also, if you have enabled “MAC Address Filter” (p.98), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC in “Address Setup” (p.98) to allow the PC to access this unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to the instruction manuals of it. The supplied remote control concurrently controls this unit and another Yamaha product that is not intended... When using multiple Yamaha products, the supplied remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on this unit. In this case, set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver (p.104). En 111 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the followings: a The power cables of this unit, TV and playback devices (BD/DVD player, etc.) are connected to AC outlets securely. b This unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (BD/DVD player, etc.) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are inserted to jacks on each devices securely. Power and system Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated 3 times consecutively. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric shock (such as lightning and excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE and reboot this unit. The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. This unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to this unit and speakers (p.19). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. Since this unit was not operated for the specified time, autostandby worked. To disable auto-standby, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.99). The unit enters standby mode automatically. This unit is uncontrollable. on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.103). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to this unit and speakers (p.19). The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric shock (such as lightning and excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE and reboot this unit. on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize En 112 Audio Problem No sound. The volume cannot be increased. No sound is heard from a specific speaker. No sound is heard from the surround back speaker. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to this unit with HDMI). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys Signals that this unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on this unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.102). The cable connecting this unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.94). Any device connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of this unit The playback source does not contain corresponding channel signals. To check it, select “7ch Stereo” (p.45). The sound program/decoder currently selected does not use the corresponding speaker. To check it, select “7ch Stereo” (p.45). Audio output of the corresponding speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker setting (p.91). The volume of the corresponding speaker is too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.93). The speaker cable connecting this unit and corresponding speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The corresponding speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replacing with another speaker. If the problem persists, this unit may be malfunctioning. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used (p.79). The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.92). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.92). The subwoofer is turned off by the auto-standby function on it. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). To check it, use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.102). This unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.97). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. En 113 Problem No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. Cause Remedy (If the TV is connected to this unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.96). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on this unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.96). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (PCM, etc.) only. Change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency device. Move this unit further away from such device. The cable connecting this unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. Any device connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of this unit Video Problem Cause Another input source is selected on this unit. No video. No video from the playback device (connected to this unit with HDMI). Remedy Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit. The video signal output from this unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.104). The cable connecting this unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by this unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.102). For information about video signals supported by this unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.124). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). To check it, use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.102). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. En 114 FM/AM radio Problem Cause There is multi-path interference. FM radio reception is weak or noisy. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. Remedy Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.50). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna commercially available. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna commercially available. Select the station manually (p.50). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Use an outdoor antenna commercially available. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Select the station manually (p.50). The AM radio signal is weak. Use an outdoor AM antenna commercially available. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. “Auto Preset” has been used. “Auto Preset” is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.50). USB and network Problem Cause Remedy This unit does not detect the USB device. The USB cable connecting this unit and USB device is not compliant with USB 2.0. Use a USB cable compliant with USB 2.0. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The folder structure not supported by this unit is applied. This unit supports folder hierarchies of up to 8 levels and up to 500 items (total of files and subfolders) per folder. If necessary, modify the folder structure on your USB device. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) is not obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on this unit (p.97). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, make sure using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.97). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select this unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.64). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of this unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. This unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and the settings of your router to connect them to the same network. This unit does not detect the PC. En 115 Problem The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. Cause Remedy The files are not supported by this unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both this unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by this unit, see “Playing back music stored on PCs” (p.64). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. It may not be available to listen because there might be a network problem, or the station might be broadcasting in limited hour. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station broadcasts audio silence currently. Some Internet radio stations broadcast audio silence during particular periods of time in a day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (router, etc). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number is variable depending on radio station. Remote control Problem This unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. External devices cannot be controlled using the remote control. The remote control does not learn new functions. Cause Remedy Out of the operating range. Use the remote control in the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. Direct sunlight or lighting is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this unit. The remote control is set to control external devices. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control this unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the main unit and remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the main unit or remote control (p.104). The remote control is set to control this unit. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in green). The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.106). Even if the remote control code is registered properly set, some products may not respond to the remote control. The batteries of the remote control of this unit and/or the external device are weak. Replace with new batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.108). The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is impossible in this case. Memory capacity is full. Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the new functions (p.109). En 116 Error indications on the front display Message (alphabetical order) Access denied Access error Cause Access to the PC is denied. Remedy Configure the sharing setting and select this unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.64). This unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. This unit cannot access the iPod connected to the USB jack. Turn off the iPod and turn on it again. Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your router (or hub) (p.31). No device This unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. This unit cannot detect the iPod connected to the USB jack. Turn off the iPod and turn on it again. (When pairing) Turn on the Bluetooth component and set it in pairing mode. Not found The Bluetooth component is not found. (When establishing a wireless connection) - Turn on the Bluetooth component. - Place the Bluetooth component within 10 m of the Bluetooth receiver. - Perform pairing again. Unknown iPod The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by this unit (p.54). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reasons. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by this unit. For information about the formats supported by this unit, see “Playing back music stored on PCs” (p.64). If this unit cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted. Over current passes through the USB device. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Unable to play USB Overloaded En 117 Ideal speaker layout Use this diagram as guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly. 0.5 to 1 m 0.5 to 1 m 1.8 m 1.8 m Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. Front speaker (L) 60° 60° Front speaker (R) Center speaker 80° 80° Surround speaker (L) Surround speaker (R) 30 cm or more Presence speaker (L) Presence speaker (R) Surround back speaker (L) Surround back speaker (R) Subwoofer En 118 Glossary Audio information Audio and video synchronization (Lipsync) Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for highdefinition programming and BD (Blu-ray disc). Selected as an optional audio standard for BD, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. Dolby TrueHD The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss of highfrequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound system. Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Bluray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for BD (Blu-ray disc), this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. Dolby Digital DTS 96/24 Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backwardcompatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. Compressed Music Enhancer En 119 DTS Digital Surround MP3 DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. DTS Express This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as BD (Blu-ray disc). It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a BD, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including BD (Blu-ray disc). Selected as an optional audio standard for BD, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for BD, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for mobile telephones, portable audio players and other low-capacity devices requiring high sound quality. In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is supported by computers, media servers and many other devices. Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including BD (Blu-ray disc). Selected as an optional audio standard for BD, this technology delivers sound that is bit-forbit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for BD, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/ amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced. DSD SILENT CINEMA Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack. Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. FLAC This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compression formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the ADPCM method. WMA An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. En 120 Video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Deep Color Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/ video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/.” S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. En 121 ■ Video conversion table Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to this unit are output to a TV as shown below. (solid line) is always available. (dotted line) is available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default). • You can select a resolution and an aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing. • This unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. HDMI out Video device This unit VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO out TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/ 576i 480i/576i 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI HDMI out HDMI HDMI in HDMI 720p HDMI 1080i 1080p COMPONENT VIDEO in COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO 480i/576i COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y COMPONENT VIDEO in S VIDEO VIDEO in VIDEO VIDEO 720p 1080i S VIDEO in S VIDEO 480p/576p S VIDEO in 480i/576i VIDEO in 480i/576i VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO En 122 To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. Information on HDMI HDMI Control • This setup is required every time when you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to this unit with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit (power, volume, etc.) in conjunction with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players, etc.) connected to this unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.21) and “Connecting video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.)” (p.26). Operations available from the TV’s remote control - Standby synchronization - Volume control including mute - Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner - Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device - Switching between audio output devices (this unit or TV speaker) (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control This unit turns off (standby) Playback device also turns off Turn off the TV Operations available from this unit’s remote control - Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV in conjunction with a scene selection (p.44) - Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) - Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote control codes (p.106) • To use HDMI Control, connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack. 1 Turn on this unit, TV and playback devices. HDMI Control on this unit, TV and playback devices (HDMI 2 Enable Control-compatible BD/DVD players, etc). To enable HDMI Control on this unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”). off the main power of the TV and then turn off this unit and 3 Turn playback devices. on the main power of the TV and then turn on this unit and 4 Turn playback devices. 5 Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit. 6 Check the followings. On this unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning 7 Check off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in step 2 and re-plugging the TV in step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices is over the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV's power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) En 123 HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multi-channel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: - 480i/60 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 576i/50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz - 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual of each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual of the playback device. • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of BD or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio commentaries of the BD or HD DVD content. En 124 Reference diagram (rear panel) RS-232C DOCK NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT 2 1 ARC PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO AM HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 7 SPEAKERS ANTENNA L HDMI 2 (BD/DVD) R COMPONENT VIDEO FM FRONT L R SURROUND L CENTER R SURROUND BACK/ BI–AMP L R ZONE 2/PRESENCE L REMOTE PR IN PR R GND SINGLE S VIDEO OUT 75Ω PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT +12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT EXTRA SP SINGLE L CENTER AC IN L R R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2 PRE OUT • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product. En 125 Trademarks “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DLNA Certified is a trademark of the Digital Living Network Alliance in the United States and other countries. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. iPod™, iPhone™ “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United States and/or other countries. iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This receiver supports network connections. Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. En 126 Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio [U.S.A. and Canada models] Audio x 5 (AV5~6, AUDIO1~2, V-AUX) [Other models] Audio x 6 (AV5~6, AUDIO1~2, PHONO, V-AUX) • Digital Audio (Support fs: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4) Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3) • Video • Video MONITOR OUT - Component x 1 - Composite x 1 AV OUT - Composite x 1 • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT1~2) Remote jacks • REMOTE IN x 1 Composite x 5 (AV3~6, V-AUX) • REMOTE OUT x 1 S-Video x 1 (AV5) [U.K. and Europe models] Component x 2 (AV1~2) • HDMI Input HDMI (Front Panel) x 1 (V-AUX) HDMI (Rear Panel) x 7 (HDMI1~7) • Other TUNER • Analog Tuner [U.K. and Europe models] FM/AM with RDS x 1 (TUNER) [Other models] FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • Satellite Radio Ready [U.S.A. model] SIRIUS Radio x 1 (SIRIUS) USB • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory, MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) • TRIGGER OUT x 1 • Current Supply Capacity: 1 A HDMI Network • HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, • PC Client Function HDMI Control (CEC), ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D • Video Format (Repeater Mode) • Compatible with Windows 7, DLNA ver. 1.5 • Internet Radio DOCK x 1 (Audio, Composite Video) - VGA USB x 1 (USB2.0) - 480i/60 Hz Compatible Decoding Formats NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX) - 576i/50 Hz • Decoding Format Output jacks • Analog Audio Speaker out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*1, EXTRA SP L/R*2) - 480p/60 Hz - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - 576p/50 Hz - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz *1 Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] *2 Note: assignment is possible. [ZONE2, PRESENCE] Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R) Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1~2, mono) AV OUT x 1 AUDIO OUT x 1 ZONE2 OUT x 1 • Audio Format DTS Express - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Digital - Dolby Pro Logic - DTS - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, - DSD 6ch - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby TrueHD - DTS-HD Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema - PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible En 127 Audio Section • Rated Output Power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8Ω) • Frequency Response AV5 etc. to Front (10 kHz to 100 kHz) .........................+0/-3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation Treble Boost/Cut.......................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz Treble Turnover ............................................................. 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics Front L/R .............................................................100 W+100 W [China, Korea, Australia, U.K. and Europe, Asia and General (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8Ω) models] H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back).......12 dB/oct. Front L/R .......................................... 130 W/ch (110 W+110 W) PHONO ...................................................................... 0±0.5 dB L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct. Center ...........................................................130 W/ch (110 W) • Total Harmonic Distortion Surround L/R.................................... 130 W/ch (110 W+110 W) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Surround Back L/R .......................... 130 W/ch (110 W+110 W) AV5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct) • Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω) (20 to 20 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω)..................................... 0.06% or less Video Section • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC [Other models] ....................................................................PAL [China, Asia and General models] [Other models] Front L/R .................................................................... 160 W/ch PHONO to REC OUT (20 to 20 kHz, 1 V) ............ 0.02% or less • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)..................... NTSC/PAL Center ........................................................................ 160 W/ch AV5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct) • Video Signal Level Surround L/R.............................................................. 160 W/ch (20 to 20 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω)..................................... 0.06% or less Surround Back L/R .................................................... 160 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) .................................. 140/180/210/250 W • Damping Factor Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 100 or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) [U.S.A. and Canada models] AV5 etc. (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV, SP OUT) ..... 100 dB or more [Other models] PHONO (Input Shorted 5 mV, REC OUT)........... 81 dB or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance [U.S.A. and Canada models] AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)...............................200 mV/47 kΩ [Other models] PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)...............................200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Signal [U.S.A. and Canada models] AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................ 2.3 V [Other models] PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD)............................................ 60 mV AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................ 2.3 V AV5 etc. (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV, SP OUT) ..... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R (SP OUT)............................................. 150 µV or less Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-Video [U.K. and Europe models] Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω C...................................................................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω Component Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω • Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off) Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB • Channel Separation [U.S.A. and Canada models] AV5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ..... 60 dB/45 dB or more [Other models] PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)... 60 dB/55 dB or more AV5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ..... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Output Level / Output Impedance REC OUT ...........................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front: Small) .................1 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..............................100 mV/560 Ω • Volume Control Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB • Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R) Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz En 128 FM Section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz Network Standby On (Typical) .........................................2.0 W • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] .............................................590 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ........................... 435 x 171 x 369 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-1/2”) • Weight ...........................................................11.1 kg (24.5 lbs) • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. Mono................................................................................ 71 dB Stereo .............................................................................. 69 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono................................................................................. 0.3% Stereo ............................................................................... 0.5% • Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced AM section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model].................... AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model] ....................................... AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 400 W/500 VA [Asia and General models]............................................. 300 W [Other models]................................................................ 330 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off / Standby Through Off..............0.1 W or less HDMI Control On/Standby Through On (Typical) ............ 2.0 W En 129 © 2011 Yamaha Corporation YD455C0/OMEN3